Home

9626-A2-GB20-00 - Zhone Technologies

1. 3 11 Automatically Removing a Circuit 0 0 ccc eee 3 13 E Seting Up Dial BackUp una kA LAGA NAA es ehacnnsedaedesaxiaeas s 3 14 Setting Up the DBM Physical Interface 3 14 Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration 3 15 Modifying ISDN Link Profiles 124a ke dE RECO Re ed RS CC C 3 18 Restricting Automatic Backup ccc eee eee eee eee 3 19 Configuring the DBM Interface to Send SNMP Traps 3 19 m Backup Over the Network Interface a 3 20 m Setting Up Management s2 lt ecccdedwentceescceentawsencweebens RES 3 20 Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site 3 20 Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP 3 21 Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site 3 21 m Setting Up Back to Back Operation a 3 22 Changing Operating Mode AA AR 3 22 Configuration Option Tables aa rhe RR Rn ems 3 23 m Configuring the Overall System a 3 23 Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System 3 24 Configuring Service Level Verification Options 3 26 Configuring General System Options 3 28 m Configuring the Physical Interfaces Aa 3 29 Configuring the Network Interface slsslus 3 29 Configuring the User Data Port cece eee eens 3 31 Configuring the IS
2. Lsuuuulussus 9 3 m Configuring the Discovered Elements a 9 4 m Grouping Elements for Reports a 9 5 m Generating Reports for a Group a 9 6 About Service Level Reports 0a 9 6 About At a Glance Reports lesen 9 6 About Trend Reports ene 9 7 ile APA EE AE 9 7 m Reports Applicable to SLV Devices 0 0 0 ccc eee 9 7 vi March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Contents A MenuHierarchy B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults E MIB QUOC kasama ad KGG Seda t Egon eee p EORR AI Foe AE RUPEE RUE B 2 m Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps lessen B 2 E System Group IG aguda sa EE TEE HERES FREE AERETDTPCREPSGrETQ44 B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectlD system 2 B 3 m Interfaces Group mib 2 a B 3 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 3 NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 5 m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps 00 a eens B 7 ic SA NIN APA AA AA Ar DES B 8 Trap authenticationFailure 4 risa usadas dee der EE RE HERE E GAGA Rd d B 8 Traps linkUp and linkDown 2 B 9 Traps enterprise Specific a B 13 Traps RMON SpecifiC iu NG dc Cheb MGA PAM ee ded xd e a wees B 15 m RMON Alarm and Event Defaults a B 16 Physical Interface
3. a IX m Product Related Documents 20 Xi m Conventions Used ax cictcedviuwc trae Goewe tus dad ce kaa ERR wd tes xii 1 About the FrameSaver SLV 9626 m SLM Overview eee RR 1 1 m FrameSaver SLV 9626 Features eee 1 2 2 User Interface and Basic Operation BH ONTI aerer KA KAWATAN BAS BV x IRURE RUE SS RUE DON UDIN AKDANG 2 2 AB AL APA AA tds ibid 2 4 m Screen Work Areas 2 2 2 2 2 5 m Navigating the Screens ees 2 6 Pe I 2 6 ans ee cnm 2 7 Selecting from a Menu n 2 8 Switching Between Screen Areas eee ee eee ees 2 8 Selecting a Field cexeecesesatriteeeLRSAC RB SAK ABBE ER dx NLA 2 9 al GS TATA a La GA PRICE 2 9 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 Contents 3 Configuration APA AA AA 3 3 Configuration Option Areas eee eens 3 4 Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 3 5 Changing Configuration Options 06 cece eee 3 6 Saving Configuration Options uasucetzecerieebae ITAY RANA AKA TAN nes 3 7 Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units 3 8 m Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock 3 8 m Setting Up the Modem 0 0 ccc nananana 3 9 Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out 3 9 m Setting Up Auto Configuration 0 0 ccc eee 3 10 Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode
4. LMI status responses that indicate a Deleted status for the DLCI All configured options relating to the deleted circuits are also deleted and they revert to their default settings A DLCI will not be deleted if the physical interface or frame relay link is down or if the DLCI is used for the TS Management Link Disable Unused network DLCIs PVC connections and management PVCs must be manually removed If the model has ISDN backup capability ISDN Link Profiles associated with the deleted records and alternate destinations will be deleted as well March 2000 3 13 Configuration Setting Up Dial Backup When configuring units with ISDN backup capability one units DBM must be configured to originate backup and the other units DBM must be configured to answer a backup call The following guidelines apply m Central site configuration guidelines Set up the ISDN DBM physical interface Change the Automatic Backup Configuration to Multi Site Backup Modify the Link Profile s that Automatic Backup Configuration created to add a phone number Configure the unit to answer calls from the remote sites m Remote site configuration guidelines Set up the ISDN DBM physical interface Modify the HQ Site Link Profile that Automatic Backup Configuration created to add a phone number Set the criteria by which automatic backup will take place Setting Up the DBM Physical Interface B Procedure 1
5. Activation of an alternate virtual circuit is not warranted that is no alarm condition on the primary destination link has been detected Disabled The PVC cannot be activated and is essentially disabled as a result of how the unit was configured Possible causes The physical interface at one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled The frame relay link on one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled Invalid m Some portion of the PVC connection is not fully configured 1 For the circuit to be active both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active 5 24 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Network Interface Status The network interface status is selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status Network Interface Status Table 5 11 Network Interface Status Field Status What It Indicates Operating Rate Kbps The frame relay network s operating rate as detected by the unit s network interface unit has not yet synchronized on the frame relay data pattern Disconnected m The line was disconnected Loop Loss dB The loss of signal strength of the received DDS network signal from the local loop 0 to 65 m Amount of lost signal strength Dieomeced m he line was disconnected 56 m 56 kbps 64KCC m 64 kbps clear channel Auto Rating m A line has been detected but the 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 25 Operation and Maintenance DBM Interface St
6. OpenLane Service Level Management Solution Provides an advanced standards based performance monitoring and management application Being standards based the OpenLane SLM system can also be used with other management applications like HP OpenView or IBM s NetView OpenLane includes HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane features with the OpenView Web interface Being Web based the OpenLane system provides Web access to the data contained in the database to provide anytime anywhere access to this information via a Web browser Some of the OpenLane SLM system s features include Real time performance graphs provide exact performance measurement details not averages which can skew performance results of service level agreement SLA parameters Historical SLV graphs provide service level management historical reports so frame relay SLAs can be verified Diagnostic troubleshooting provides an easy to use tool for performing tests which include end to end PVC loopback connectivity and physical interface tests Basic configuration allows you to configure FrameSaver devices and set RMON alarms and thresholds Network DLCI Circuit IDs can also be assigned Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery allows all SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled to be discovered automatically along with their PVCs ISDN backup capability is supported A FrameSaver unit can be
7. RTS 2 Not DTR or RTS but link is down String ifString SalarmString down due to e g Sync Data Port S01P1 DTR and RTS down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the port String ifString up linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the interface Strings ifString down No alarms exist on the link ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the interface String ifString up 1 The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the DTH lead state The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the RTS lead state 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 B 11 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 3 of 3 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Logical Link Sublayer Network iflndex RFC 1573 m linkDown LMI is down for the BRI itAdminS LMI Protocol configured or Synchronous REC 1573 Frame Relay link is disabled Data Port ifString LMI down No ifOperStatus RFC 1573 alarms exist on the link Service Side of the devLastTrapString RUE E NATA Hi Frame Relay UNI devHealthAndStatus Pa DD E RE LMI down Supported by the mib media specific Frame
8. SLV Packet Size bytes Available Settings 64 2048 Default Setting 64 Sets the size of packets in bytes that will be used for SLV communications SLV packets are used to track latency and other SLV related variables When the packet size is changed a new round trip and average latency calculation must be performed so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance Statistics screen until a new sampling interval has occurred 64 2048 Sets the packet size for SLV communications SLV Synchronization Role Available Settings Tributary Controller None Default Setting Tributary Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data collection and storage between SLV devices Tributary Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and provides network based synchronization information to other devices in the network Controller Uses its own internal time of day clock and provides synchronization information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock NOTE Only one device in the network should be configured as the SLV synchronization controller None Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out This setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable or when a single unit connects multiple networks or network segments 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 27 Configuration
9. An LED appears dysfunctional Not receiving data Receiving data errors on a multiplexed DLCI but frame relay is okay Possible Cause Login or password is incorrect COM port is misconfigured or the unit is otherwise configured so it prevents access The unit has detected an internal software failure LED is burned out Network cable loose or broken Frame Relay Discovery is being used for automatic DLCI and PVC configuration The equipment at the other end is not frame relay RFC 1490 compliant March 2000 Solutions m Reset the unit see Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Contact your service representative Record the 8 digit code from the System and Test Status screen Reset the unit and try again Contact your service representative and provide the 8 digit failure code Run the Lamp Test If the LED in question does not flash with the other LEDs then contact your service representative m Reconnect or repair the cable m Call the network service provider Change the DLCI Type for each network DLCI from Multiplexed to Standard turning off multiplexing 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Frame Relay PVC Problems 9626 A2 GB20 00 Table 6 3 Frame Relay PVC Problems Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Incorrect configuration of Verify the PVC connections the DLCI cross and DLCls by checking the connections network discovered DLCls on the LMI R
10. No DLCls available for connection No DLCls Available for Mgmt PVC No DLCls Defined No more DLCIs allowed 5 10 New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of PVOs has already been created Name entered for a management PVC has been used previously New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCIs are available on the network link which is a suitable PVC Destination New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but all configured DLCIs have been connected New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all Link DLCI pairs have been connected New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all configured DLCls have been connected DLCI Records was selected from an interface s Configuration Edit Display menu and no DLCI Hecords have been created for this interface New or CopyFrom was selected from an interface s DLCI Records configuration screen and the maximum number of DLCI Records had already been reached March 2000 m Do not create the PVC connection m Delete another PVC connection and try again Enter another 4 character name for the logical management link Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again No action needed or configure more DLCls and try again Configure more network and or Port 1 Links DLCls pairs and try
11. Provides service level information for various groups Using this report you can compare service level performance of various groups The report summarizes service levels for a group of DLCIs along with details on individual DLCIs within that group Customer Service Level Report Provides service level information for customers This report is used to provide service level information to service customers to help them determine optimum service levels needed based upon their own traffic data as well as provide documented evidence for increasing CIR It combines daily volume daily Health exceptions bandwidth distribution average Health Index ratings and availability for each DLCI onto a single page At a Glance Reports Provides consolidated DLCI and network performance information onto a single page At a Glance Report Consolidates bandwidth utilization network traffic events occurring over the reporting period and availability and latency levels information Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCI s poor Health Index rating FrameSaver SLV Plus At a Gl
12. System Use system LMI options see Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Custom Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the n
13. connection m Delete the connection then delete the DLCI Duplicate DLCI DLCI number entered is not No action needed previous Number unique for the frame relay contents of the DLCI number link field is restored File Transfer Complete A file transfer was Switch to the newly downloaded Seen at an FTP performed successfully software terminal See Changing Software 5 8 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 5 Device Messages 2 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do File Transfer Failed Invalid file Seen at an FTP m Exit the FTP session or terminal download another file A file transfer was m Try again making sure you attempted but it was not type the filename correctly successful See Changing Software Invalid Character x A non valid printable ASCII character has been entered Reenter information using valid characters A non valid date was Reenter the date in the entered on the System month day 4 digit year format Information screen Invalid date must be mm dd yyyy A non valid date or time Reenter the date in the was entered on the System month day 4 digit year format Information screen The and or time in the date does not exist e g hour minutes seconds format February 30th Invalid date and or time Reenter the time in the hour minutes seconds format Invalid time m
14. 24 00 Default Setting 24 00 Specifies the time that Auto Backup must end occurring for the selected day of the week in increments of 1 hour Display Conditions This option only appears if a start time was specified 00 00 24 00 Specifies the time of day that Auto Backup will stop for this particular day 3 70 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins This chapter includes the following 9626 A2 GB20 00 Limiting Access Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port Controlling ISDN Access ISDN Call Security Disabling ISDN Access Controlling Telnet or FTP Access Limiting Telnet Access Limiting FTP Access Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link Controlling SNMP Access Disabling SNMP Access Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses Creating a Login Modifying a Login Deleting a Login March 2000 4 1 Security and Logins Limiting Access The FrameSaver unit provides access security on the following interfaces m Asynchronous terminal m Telnet m FIP SNMP Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time that is you can have two simultaneous Telnet sessions or one Telnet session and one active asynchronous terminal session or two simultaneous asynchronous terminal sessions Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Direc
15. Configuration Table 3 18 Modem Port Options 3 of 4 IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the system via the modem port This option is only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the modem port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the IP address for the modem port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 When the IP Address is all zeros the modem port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the system This option is only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the modem port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 o
16. Configuring General System Options Select General from the System menu to configure the general system configuration options see Table 3 3 Main Menu Configuration System General Table 3 3 General System Options Test Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they are terminated automatically Enable All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout This setting is recommended when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in band data stream If the FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface providing the management access control can be regained after the timeout expires terminating the test Disable Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated Test Duration min Possible Settings 1 120 Default Setting 10 Specifies the maximum duration of the tests Display Conditions This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable 1 120 Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes inclusive 3 28 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring the Physical Interfaces Characteristics for the following physical interfaces can be configured m Network Interface m User Data Port m ISDN BRI DBM if the unit has ISDN backup capability Configuring the Network Interface Select Physical from the Network menu to confi
17. Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer Network iflndex RFC 1573 m linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the ifAdminStatus DDS interface Supported by the RFC 1573 TP media specific Alarm conditions include DDS Enterprise MIB OperStatus RFC 1573 L No Signal NOS devLastTrapString Out of Service OOS devHealthAndStatus Out of Frame OOF mib Cross Pair Detected In band Framing Error Excessive BiPolar Violations BPVs String SifString down due to alarmString e g Network DDS down due to NOS and cross pair SifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the interface String SifString up B 10 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 2 of 3 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer cont d Synchronous Data Port Supported by the media specific RS232 like MIB BRI Supported by the ISDN MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib m linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the port Alarm conditions include DIR
18. 3 65 3 68 Routing Information RIP 3 50 B 65 3 69 Serial Line IP SLIP 3 65 3 68 Simple Network Management SNMP PVC availability connection status connections 3 41 total number Loopback 6 20 Management 3 48 total number dedicated name 3 46 9 58 tests 6 19 troubleshooting problems March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Q quality of service Quick Reference R ratios FDR and DDR rear panels remote units minimal configuration reports Network Health resetting statistics the unit unit default configuration options restoring communication with a misconfigured unit retrieving statistics Return Enter key 2 6 revision software and hardware RFC 1213 and 1573 RFC 1315 RFC 1604 RFC 1659 RFC 1757 RFC 2021 RFC 2127 right arrow key 2 6 RIP 1 3 8 21 8 65 3 69 RJ11 modem connector modular cable RJ48S network cable RMON alarm and event defaults Specific Traps Traps 3 59 user history collection router setting up to receive RIP router independence Routing Information Protocol RIP 3 65 Routing Information Protocol RIP 3 69 running reports RXD control lead 9626 A2 GB20 00 Index S Sampling SLV Inband and Interval saving configuration options screen area function keys area how to navigate scrolling through valid selections security 1 2 P 1 2 2 3 6 SNMP NMS options 3 56 sele
19. Absolute or Delta radio button Rising Falling or Both radio button Threshold Value that will trigger a trap 1 Latency MIB variables should be Absolute all others should be Delta Generally Rising is selected 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add this alarm 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 until all traps are configured for all DLCIs Refer to Configuring Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 8 12 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Creating History Files 9626 A2 GB20 00 Up to 14 additional user history tables can be created in the FrameSaver unit for each interface An interface is a specific DLCI or the entire frame relay interface A table must be created for each DLCI or frame relay link to be monitored Additional user history tables are created using the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus to load a file that contains the OIDs Object IDs to be monitored into the unit OpenLane provides several useful examples including three files containing a complete set of OIDs appropriate to the interface to be monitored one for a DLCI one for a frame relay link and one containing system type OIDs Any of these files can be used as a template when creating customized history files specific to the FrameSaver unit These files have a pdn udh user defined history format
20. B gt Procedure If Port Use is set to Net Link SNMP Telnet FTP and trap dial out 1 Dial the modem s phone number using a PC running PPP or SLIP link protocol 2 From the PC run an IP Ping test to the modem interface If your results using either method are unsuccessful make sure both ends of the modem cable are properly seated and secured Then verify that the modem was configured correctly see Setting Up the Modem in Chapter 3 Configuration 5 46 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance ISDN BRI DBM Operation The following sections only apply to the model with the built in ISDN BRI DBM They include the following m Manually Forcing Backup Disruptive m Manually Placing a Call Nondisruptive m Verifying ISDN Lines m Verifying That Backup Can Take Place Manually Forcing Backup Disruptive Use this procedure to force backup when network maintenance is planned when equipment problems are reported or when testing the backup path whenever data needs to be forced from the primary destination interface to the alternate destination typically from the DDS network to the ISDN B Procedure 1 Make sure the ISDN Link Profiles are set up correctly Auto Backup is enabled and the ISDN interface is enabled see Setting Up Dial Backup in Chapter 3 Configuration 2 Have someone at the far end disconnect the network cable The originating unit should initiate backup To determine the answering
21. Configure the DBM interface Main Menu gt Configuration ISDN Physical 2 Enable the interface and enter the Service Profile IDs SPIDs and local phone numbers If the unit is at the central site change the Originate or Answer setting to Answer 3 Save the configuration See Table 3 6 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options for configuration information March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration 9626 A2 GB20 00 The Automatic Backup Configuration feature is used to automatically create alternate DLCI records and PVC connections on the ISDN DBM backup interface for current or newly discovered PVC Connections and Management PVCs This feature is already set up in FrameSaver units with a DBM with Single Site Backup as the default If the unit is at the central site change the Automatic Backup Configuration to Multi Site Backup if necessary Main Menu Auto Configuration Automatic Backup Configuration The following selections can be made If the selection is Then Single Site Backup Alternate destinations are automatically configured using a single ISDN Link Profile to backup all network PVC default for a BRI DBM Connections and Management PVCs over the primary destination ISDN link All DLC Is are configured on this ISDN link using the first ISDN Link Profile and using the same DLCI number as the network s DLCI Multi Site Backup Alternate
22. DDS FR NAM 101010001 DBM interface if applicable Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay Logical Layer FR Bundle Multilink Frame Relay FR Bundle Profile Link Name 101025001 MFR Bundle Hardware Version hhhh hhh to 101025120 Frame relay For the user side 101024001 logical link on DDS Network DDS of FR DTE network interface DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Network DDS of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 1 DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame relay For the user side 101016001 logical link on Synchronous Data Port of Synchronous Data FR DTE Slot 1 Port 1 Port 1 DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 1 DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame relay logical For the user side 101018001 link on BRI ISDN BRI DBM of FR DTE 101018002 if applicable Profile Link Name DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side ISDN BRI DBM of FR SERVICE Profile Link Name DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh B 4 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with NetScout Probes use the following ifName ifDescr and iflndex Table B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information 1 of 2 Fram
23. Display Conditions This option does not appear for a user data port and it cannot be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Management Link Standard Supports standard DLCls as specified by the Frame Relay Standards Use this setting when a non FrameSaver unit is at the other end For user data port DLCls this is the only selection available Multiplexed Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI Allows a single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCIs as long as these connections are between the same two endpoints proprietary Do not select Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection 3 38 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options 2 of 3 CIR bps Possible Settings 0 64000 Default Setting 64000 Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry without discarding frames the CIR in bits per second Entry of an invalid rate causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 x where x the maximum line rate available on the port 0 64000 Specifies the network committed data rate Possible Settings 1 65535 Default Setting Read Only Displays the DLCs calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval Tc in milliseconds This value is calculated based upon the settings for the Committed Burst Size Bc Bits and CIR bps options Committed Burst
24. Document Number Document Title Paradyne FrameSaver SLV Documentation 9626 A2 GL10 FrameSaver SLV 9626 Quick Reference 9626 A2 GN10 FrameSaver SLV 9626 Installation Instructions Document Number Document Title Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation 7800 A2 GZ41 OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for UNIX Quick Start Installation Instructions 7800 A2 GZ42 OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions Document Number Document Title NetScout Documentation 2930 170 NetScout Probe User Guide 2930 610 NetScout Manager Plus User Guide 2930 620 NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Aaministrator Guide 2930 788 NetScout Manager Plus Set Up amp Installation Guide Document Number Document Title Concord Communications Documentation 09 10010 005 Network Health User Guide 09 10020 005 Network Health Installation Guide 09 10050 002 Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide 09 10070 001 Network Health Reports Guide Contact your sales or service representative to order product documentation Complete Paradyne documentation for this product is available at www paradyne com Select Library Technical Manuals To order a paper copy of this manual m Within the U S A call 1 800 PARADYNE 1 800 727 2396 m Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 8623 March 2000 xi About This Guide Conventions Used Convention Used When Used Italic To indicate variable information
25. FR DTE MIB 60 secs RFC 2115 1 min Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs RFC 2115 1 min Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D 60 secs 1 min Congested Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciSts CongestedSecs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciNetDropFr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Frames Dropped by Network 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 20 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area These alarms can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are put into the NetScout alarm area Table B 12 identifies alarm defaults that do not change and Table B 13 identifies alarm defaults that change when the interface s line speed changes The thresholds for these alarms can be edited using NetScout Manager Plus so they match the values in the SLA between the customer and service provider Up to eight alarms per interface are allowed Any additional alarms are added to the Par
26. IFN and the DLCI number to be monitored must replace DLCI Example frCircuitSentFrames Change 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 IFN DICI to 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 101024001 301 The only valid interface number for a FrameSaver 9626 is 101024001 4 Edit the new file as needed Refer to Creating UDH Files and Using Custom History in the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Default for OID information for an interface 8 14 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Installing the User Defined History Files 9626 A2 GB20 00 Once the user defined history files have been created the files need to be installed History files are installed from the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus Should the FrameSaver unit be reset these files will need to be reinstalled The command used to install a new user history table is located in NSHOME bin CAUTION Do not use user history table 1 or 2 UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 are the default user history files used to keep SLV data for reports Editing either of these files will destroy SLV reporting capability B gt Procedure 1 Type dvuhist f agentname user history table number config number of buckets interval download file udh to load user defined history files for the frame relay link Example dvuhist f Dallas51 3 config 30 60 Dallasbik udh The in
27. Loopback and send monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the selected DLCI FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit If a PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit the other end can send and monitor pattern tests The example below shows a PVC Test screen for a FrameSaver unit with ISDN backup capability with the multiplexed DLCI 550 selected If a standard DLCI was selected Disruptive rather than Non Disruptive would be displayed after Test Also the Connectivity test would not appear PVC Tests Screen Example main test isdn pvc Device Name Node A 9626 5 26 1999 23 32 ISDN FLA PVC TESTS DLCI Number 550 Test Non Disruptive Command Status Result PVC Loopback Start Inactive Send Pattern Start Inactive Monitor Pattern Start Inactive Connectivity Inactive Test Call Active 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 Sequence Errors 2999994 Data Errors 999994 RndTrip Time ms 99999 Frame Relay Link Up Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu If the unit does not have the built in ISDN DBM feature Test Call does not appear NOTE Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs in the two FrameSaver units If errors are detected verify the CIR configuration and retest March 2000 6 19 Troubleshooting PVC Loopback 6 20 The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per PVC basis
28. MM Major mm minor bb build format NAM CCA number hardware version in hhhh hhh format Serial number sssssss FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 The following is the system object identifier sysObjectlD system 2 or OID for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver 9626 unit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 1 6 Interfaces Group mib 2 Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group as defined in RFC 1573 and RFC 1213 which is an SNMPv1 MIB is provided in this section Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table if Table The following table provides the ifName for each interface type the ifDescr and the iflndex that Paradyne has assigned to each Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information 1 of 2 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Physical Layer Network DDS DDS network interface Network DDS DDS FR NAM 101021001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Sync Data Port Synchronous Data Synchronous Data Port Slot 1 101003001 S01P1 Port 1 Port 1 DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh COM Communications port COM Port DDS FR NAM 101004001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 B 3 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information 2 of 2 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Physical Layer cont d Modem port Modem Port DDS FR NAM 101005001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh ISDN BHI ISDN BRI DBM ISDN BRI DBM
29. Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only Both Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events Enterprise Specific Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Disable Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events 3 58 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 3 of 5 Link Traps Possible Settings Disable Up Down Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of the interfaces A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces is active Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages Disable Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages Up Sends trap messages for linkUp events only Down Sends trap messages for linkDown events only Both Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events Link Traps Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports DBM All Default Setting All Specifies w
30. The Are you sure prompt appears Select Yes The unsupported domain disappears from the list 8 6 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 3 To add a FrameSaver SLV supported domain or correct property settings select the Edit button to the right of the Domain section of the Property Editor window The Edit Domain window opens Edit Domain Domains Logging DLcoUFartiun Enable 4 Disable zi Hosts Enable 4 Disable 4 Conversations Disable Disable Short Term History EE samples seconds Long Term History samples seconds 4 Click on the domain from the Domains list and configure the following Property Description Setting Groups Stats S Statistics collection Enabled for all domains Hosts H Level 3 information Enabled for IP domain only network Disabled for all other domains Conversations C Protocols being used Disabled for all domains Logging Event logging Disabled for all domains and groups 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply the changes Refer to Configuring Domains in Properties Files in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 8 7 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be configured and assigned to each DLCI Open
31. Viewing LEDs and Control Leads and DBM Call Performance Statistics for additional information 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 49 Operation and Maintenance FTP File Transfers 5 50 The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol FTP server over Transmission Control Protocol TCP A complete binary image of the configuration files can be copied to a host to provide a backup To use this feature the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions Using this feature you can transfer configuration files to from a FrameSaver node program files to a FrameSaver node and User History data from a FrameSaver node through a user data port or the network interface using a management PVC or through the COM port Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer m You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get commands However you can retrieve the data file for the user history reports regardless of access level m You cannot put a configuration file to the factory cfg or current cfg files under the system directory Configuration files should be put to a customer file cust1 cfg or cust2 cfg then loaded into the downloaded unit s Current Configuration via the menu driven user interface m You can only put a NAM program file nam ocd into a FrameSaver unit You cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host m Before putting a download file you must use the bin bin
32. again Configure more network and or Port 1 DLCIs and try again Select New and create a DLCI record Delete a DLCI then create the new DLCI Record 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 5 Device Messages 4 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do No Primary Destination Link DLCIs Available No Security Records to Delete Password Matching Error Re enter Password Permission Denied Seen at an FTP terminal Please Wait Resetting Device Please Wait 9626 A2 GB20 00 New or Modify was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable Primary PVC Destination Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again If a network DLCI has been entered as a Source DLCI 1 Change the Source DLCI to a user data port DLCI Enter the network DLCI as the PVC s Primary Destination Delete was selected from No action needed the Administer Login screen and no security records had been defined Enter a security record Password entered in the He enter Password field of the Administer Logins screen does not match what was entered in the Password field Try again Contact your system administrator to verify your password A file transfer was attempted but the m User did not have Level 1 security See your system administrator
33. e g DLCI nnnn Menu selection sequence To provide an abbreviated method for indicating the selections to be made from a menu or selections from within a menu before performing a procedural step For example Main Menu Status System and Test Status indicates that you should select Status from the Main Menu then select System and Test Status from the Status menu Path To provide a checkpoint that coincides with the menu path shown at the top of the screen Always shown within parentheses so you can verify that you are referencing the correct table e g Path main config alarm Brackets To indicate multiple selection choices when multiple options can be displayed e g Clear Network Port 1 Statistics Text highlighted in red To indicate a hyperlink to additional information when viewing this manual online Click on the highlighted text xii March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 About the FrameSaver SLV 9626 This chapter includes the following m SLM Overview m FrameSaver SLV 9626 Features SLM Overview The Service Level Management SLM Solution consists of m FrameSaver SLV units m OpenLane SLM system m NetScout Manager Plus application m Standalone NetScout Probes if needed This solution provides increased manageability monitoring and diagnostics so customers can identify problems more efficiently troubleshoot those problems faster and maximize their network to control costs It is als
34. occurred every 20 ms for 2 seconds Internal Modem Failed The unit s internal modem failed to pass the self test ISDN Active An ISDN call is active ISDN Link Profile Disabled An ISDN backup call could not be made because ISDN Link Name the ISDN link profile specified Link Name is disabled Main Menu Configuration ISDN gt Link Profiles ISDN Link Profile Invalid The ISDN link profile specified ISDN Link Name ISDN Link Name is invalid ISDN Network Failed Active ldle An ISDN network failure was detected when m Active Backup call was in progress dle DBM was in Idle mode Link Down Administratively The specified frame relay link has been disabled frame relay link by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI Protocol on another link is in a failed state Link Profile Disabled An ISDN backup call could not be made because ISDN Link Name the specified link profile was disabled LMI Discovery in Progress Local Management Interface protocol discovery is frame relay link in progress to determine which protocol will be used on the specified frame relay link LMI Down frame relay link 2 The Local Management Interface s has been declared down for the specified frame relay link 2 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on
35. pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyMax 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 8 1 D Latency Packet Size MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyPacketSz Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T 2 The time mask B 26 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 4 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 2 1 D N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 3 I D N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 4 1 D N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 2 I N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 3 I N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 4 I N 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number Burst Upper Limit 1 5 Burst Octets 1 5 Burst Frames 1 5 LMI Unavailable Seconds Total Rx CRC Errors Total Tx Errors Total Rx Errors Total LMI Errors Port Burst Upper Limits 1 4 Rx Port Burst Octets 1 5 Tx Port Burst Octets 1
36. resulting from an attempt to send an SNMP trap message is retried using an alternate telephone number Up to 5 alternate call directories can be set up but only one at a time can be used When Call Retry is enabled the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed after one additional try then the specified alternate directory s telephone number is called None Does not dial out using one of the alternate directory telephone numbers 1 5 Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call if a call cannot be completed using the telephone number in the alarm directory Directory Number A in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories inclusive 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 61 Configuration Configuring the Communication Port 3 62 Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to display or change the communication port configuration options see Table 3 17 Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Communication Port Table 3 17 Communication Port Options 1 of 4 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the COM port NOTE If the Default IP Destination is set to COM see Table 3 11 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The COM port is used for the asynchronous terminal connecti
37. 1 2 To DSU In Local Loopback LL Transmit Data TXD 103 To DSU In Receive Data RXD 104 From DSU Out Transmit Signal Element Timing 113 To DSU In DTE Source XTXC or TT Receive Signal Element Timing 115 From DSU Out DCE Source RXC A B Transmit Signal Element Timing From DSU Out A DCE Source TXC A B Test Mode Indicator TM From DSU Out NN o H HDn gt S o gt sc s XxX lt lt 05 Um 2 Standard V 35 Straight Through Cable A standard V 35 straight through cable can be used to connect a DTE port to a DTE where a 34 pin plug type connector is needed for the data port and a 34 position socket type connector is needed for the DTE No special order cables are required C 4 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments DDS Network Connector The DDS network interface connector is an RJ48S 8 position keyed modular jack The cable for this interface comes with the FrameSaver unit DDS Network Cable Feature No 3600 F3 501 Network access is via a 14 foot modular cable with an RJ48S keyed plug type connector on each end The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Direction Pin Number Transmit Ring To Local Loop 2 Transmit Tip Receive Tip Receive Ring Modem Connector The dial modem interface connector that is integrated into the FrameSaver
38. 4 Security and Logins you are prompted to enter them If not press Enter The FTP prompt appears The starting directory is the root directory Use standard FTP commands during the FTP session as well as the following remote FTP commands Command Definition cd directory Change the current directory on the FrameSaver node to the specified directory dir directory Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory If no directory is specified the current one is used get file file2 Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node to the local directory on the host for configuration files only remotehelp Print the meaning of the command If no argument is given a command list of all Known commands is printed Is directory Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory s contents If no directory is specified the current one is used put file7 file2 Copy file from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the current directory of the FrameSaver node If file2 is not specified the file will be named file1 on the FrameSaver node recv file1 file 2 Same as a get pwd Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit node bin Places the FTP session in binary transfer mode 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 51 Operation and Maintenance Upgrading System Software If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit s program code you must transfer the upgrade o
39. 5 N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T 2 The time mask MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstUpL imit MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstOctets MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstFrames MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkNoL MISecs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotL MIErrs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtil TxOctets See Table B 15 on page B 28 for an RMON alarm OID cross reference 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 B 27 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 Alarm OID Cross Reference 1 of 2 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Frames Sent MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx CIR Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7
40. 59 59 is exceeded the counter resets and begins the count again Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Tables The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble free service However if a problem occurs refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for possible solutions Device Problems Table 6 2 Device Problems 1 of 2 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No power or the LEDs The power cord is not Check that the power cord is are not lit securely plugged into the securely attached at both ends wall receptacle to rear panel connection The wall receptacle has no Check the wall receptacle power power by plugging in some equipment that is known to be working Check the circuit breaker Verify that your site is not on an energy management program Power On Self Test The unit has detected an Reset the unit and try again fails Only Alarm LED internal hardware failure is on after power on Contact your service representative Return the unit to the factory refer to Warranty Sales Service and Training Information on page A of this document 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 6 11 Troubleshooting 6 12 Table 6 2 Device Problems 2 of 2 Symptom Cannot access the unit or the menu driven user interface Failure xxxxxxxx appears at the top of the System and Test Status screen at Self Test Results
41. 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 1 N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 71 61 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 71 71 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 11 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 I 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 201 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 281 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 l 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 l 9626 A2 GB20 00 Current Latency Frame Size Upper Limits 1 5 Frame Size Count 1 5 Rx Short Frames Rx Long Frames LMI Sequence Errors Tx Discards Rx Discards Rx Nonoctet Aligns Rx CRC Errors Rx Illegal Frames Tx Total Errors Rx Total Errors Rx Overruns Tx Underruns Total LMI Errors March 2000 MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkSeqErr MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkR
42. Call Awarded and Being Delivered in Est Chnl 7 An incoming call is being No action is needed connected to an already established channel that is used for similar calls Call Rejected Equipment sending the No action is needed cause does not want to receive the call at this time 2 Verify that the remote DBM s link profile is correct Call With Requested Call ID Has Been Cleared Network has received a call No action is needed resume request but the call had been cleared after it was suspended Channel Type Not Implemented Device sending this cause Arrange for the desired does not support the capability requested channel type Channel Unacceptable Channel identified for the Arrange for the desired call is not acceptable to the capability receiving device Destination Out of Order Destination interface Verify that the remote specified is not functioning DBM s link profile is correctly so the signalling correct message could not be delivered e g physical or data link layer failure at the remote end user equipment is offline 57 65 58 7 21 Call Terminated by 130 Remote DBM rejected or 1 Retry the call Remote End terminated the call 86 66 6 27 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 29 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 13 Last Cause Value Messages 2 of 6 Message Facility Rejected Incoming Calls Barred Incompatible Destination
43. DBM Problems Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Cannot connect to the remote unit Misconfiguration DBM LMI comes up but no data is transferred Misconfiguration Verify that the link profiles are correct in both units both the area codes and phone or ID numbers see Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles in Chapter 3 Configuration For a BRI DBM verify that the SPIDs and local area codes and phone numbers are correct see Configuring the ISDN BRI DBM Interface in Chapter 3 Configuration Verify that the unit at one end is configured to originate and the unit at the other end is configured to answer a call Verify that the ISDN interface is enabled Verify that Auto Backup is enabled and no time restrictions apply Check that the DLCI numbers are correct and are the same at both ends See the ast Cause Value Messages in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for additional information about ISDN problems Last Cause Value messages appear on the DBM Interface Status screen Main Menu Status DBM Interface Status See Configuring the ISDN BRI DBM Interface and Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about ISDN DBM configuration 6 14 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Tests Available The following tests are available to a FrameSaver SLV 9626 Test Menu Example with a DBM main test 9626 Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 TEST Network PVC
44. DBM Tests Starting and Stopping a Test Aborting All Tests PVC Tests PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern March 2000 6 1 Troubleshooting Connectivity Test Call m Physical Tests CSU External Network Loopback DSU Internal Network Loopback Latching Loopback Send 511 Monitor 511 DTE Loopback m P Ping Test m Lamp lest Problem Indicators The unit provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems Indicators LEDs Viewing LEDs and Control Leads and LED Descriptions in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for an additional faceplate Backup LED its description as well as the user interface screen Main Menu Status gt Display LEDs and Control LEDs Health and Status Health and Status Messages in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance Main Menu Status System and Test Status Messages also appear at the bottom of any menu driven user interface screen Performance statistics Performance Statistics in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance to help you determine how long a problem has existed Alarm conditions that will Alarms on page 6 7 generate an SNMP trap SNMP traps Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps supported include warm start authentication failure enterprise specific those specific to the unit link up and link down 6 2 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Resett
45. DTE In 6 Signal Ground GND 7 DCE Carrier Detect CD To DTE Out 8 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR From DTE In 20 Pins 5 6 and 8 are tied together C 2 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments LAN Adapter Converter and Cable If connecting to a LAN order a plug to modular jack converter and a LAN Adapter cable The following shows the pin assignments for the m DB25 plug to 8 position modular jack converter between the COM port and the 8 conductor LAN Adapter cable Feature No 3100 F1 920 m Custom 8 conductor cable with modular plugs on both ends between the converter and the LAN Adapter Feature No 3100 F2 910 Plug to Modular Jack Converter Com Port 8 Position Plug to Plug to DB25 Plug Modular Jack Modular Jack LAN Adapter Tx Clock 15 EE Unused jee be Ki Signal Ground Tx Data Tx Data Signal Ground B CD RTS Rx Clock 17 7 2 DTR 20 8 4 Frame Ground Unused 98 16214 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 C 3 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments DTE Port Connector The following table provides the pin assignments for the 34 position V 35 connector to the DTE 34 Pin Signal ITU CT Direction Socket Shield 101 A Signal Ground Common 102 B Request to Send RTS 105 To DSU In Data Set Ready DSR 107 From DSU Out E Receive Line Signal Detector 109 From DSU Out F RLSD or LSD Data Terminal Ready DTR 108
46. Dord Display the next page March 2000 2 7 User Interface and Basic Operation Selecting from a Menu B gt Procedure To select from a menu 1 Tab or press the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection or press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor from position to position 2 Press Enter The selected menu or screen appears B gt Procedure To return to a previous screen press the Escape Esc key until you reach the desired screen Switching Between Screen Areas Use Ctrl a to switch between screen areas see the example on page 2 5 B Procedure To switch to the function keys area 1 Press Ctrl a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area 2 Select either the function s designated underlined character or Tab to the desired function key 3 Press Enter The function is performed To return to the screen area press Ctrl a again 2 8 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Selecting a Field User Interface and Basic Operation Once you reach the desired menu or screen select a field to view or change or issue a command Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another The current setting or value appears to the right of the field Entering Information 9626 A2 GB20 00 You can enter information in one of three ways Select the field then Manually t
47. Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login If you want to allow users to configure the unit or perform file transfers including downloads keep the access at Level 1 Level 1 access is required to download software to the unit or to upload or download configuration files Level 3 is sufficient for NMS access for SLV historical information Limit bandwidth for FTP FTP Max Receive Rate to a rate less than the network line speed typically less than or equal to the CIR This method is not recommended if SLV reports are desired since FTP is required to generate the reports 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about setting FTP configuration options 4 6 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link B Procedure To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Disable Telnet Session and or FTP Session as appropriate 3 Return to the Management and Communication menu and select Node IP 4 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable access via a TS Management Link to None TS Management Link Assign an
48. Level Verifier SLV unit It is intended for system designers engineers administrators and operators There are two models of the FrameSaver 9626 one without backup capability and one with an integral ISDN BRI DBM Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface Dial Backup Module If ISDN backup is desired the model with the built in DBM must be ordered this capability cannot be added later You must be familiar with the functional operation of digital data communications equipment and frame relay networks Section Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Description About the FrameSaver SLV 9626 Identifies how the FrameSaver 9626 unit fits into Paradyne s SLM solution and describes the unit s features User Interface and Basic Operation Shows how to navigate the user interface Configuration Provides configuration information for the FrameSaver 9626 Security and Logins Provides procedures for controlling access to the FrameSaver SLV and setting up logins Operation and Maintenance Provides procedures to display unit identification information and perform file transfers as well as how to display and interpret status and statistical information Troubleshooting Provides device problem resolution alarm and other information as well as troubleshooting and test procedures March 2000 ix About This Guide Product Related Documents 9626 A2 GB20 00
49. NetScout Manager Plus Network B Procedure 1 2 4 Bring up the NetScout Manager Plus main window Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar on the left side of the window File w Agent wr AgentGroup w Switch FrameRel ay A list of configured frame relay agents appear in the list box below the Name and IP Address headings If this is a new NetScout Manager Plus installation the list box below the selection bar is blank since no agents are configured yet Select the Admin radio button from the application selection bar to the far right of the screen Applicable configuration and administration icons appear in the box below the application bar Help vw Application 4 Admin Click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Select the Add button down the center of the screen Minimally enter the following Agent name IP address Properties File Select paradyne Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add the agent discover its DLCls and return to the Configuration Manager main window The frame relay agent just entered appears in the agent list box with its DLCls in the DLCI list box at the bottom of the screen Select the Test button fourth button down center of the screen to make sure you can communicate with the agent Refer to Adding Frame Relay Agents in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetS
50. Network PVC Loopback Data Port Send Pattern Other Monitor Pattern IP Ping Physical Tests Connectivity Lamp Test Local Loopbacks Test Call Abort All Tests Pattern Tests 99 16474a A 2 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Edit Display System Network Data Ports ISDN Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status Load Test Configuration from Auto Configuration Control PVC Connections Management and Communication Auto Backup Criteria ISDN Physical Link Profiles e DLCI Records PVC Connection Table Source Link DLCI EDLCI Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Network and Data Ports Physical System Frame Relay and LMI Service Level Verification General Frame Relay DLCI Records New or Modify PVC Connection Entry MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatic Circuit Removal Automatic Backup Configuration Control Management and Communication Options Node IP e Management PVCs General SNMP Management Telnet and FTP Session e SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps Communication Port Modem Port New or Modify Management PVC Entry MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Modem Call Directories System Information Administer Logins Change Oper
51. PVC Tests Monitor Pattern The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync An Out of Sync message appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence These error counts are updated every second If the maximum count is reached 999994 appears in these fields March 2000 6 21 Troubleshooting Connectivity Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver device at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active This test stops automatically and can only be executed for circuit multiplexed PVCs To run a connectivity test on a link Main Menu Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN PVC Tests Connectivity Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC A RndTrip Time ms message appears in the Result column when a response is received within 5 seconds indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the remote end is alive operational and connected and the round trip RT time is shown in milliseconds ms with a resolution of 1 ms If a response is not received within 5 seconds No Response appears in the Result column Test Call Test Call tests the device s ability to place a call It allows an alternate means of controlling the activation or deactivation of an ISDN link This test only appears for a FrameSaver device with a DBM that is configured to originate bac
52. RMON Alarm Defaults Object ID Cross References Numeric Order The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap is sent and or a log entry is made This table is helpful in identifying alarm conditions being tracked when viewing the NetScout Custom History screen shown below which provides the OID instead of the alarm condition NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 File View Format NetScout Custom History GrenadaS1 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds 0 11 00 16 11 05 16 11 10 17 11 15 17 11 20 16 11 25 16 Wed Oct 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 See Table B 14 for an RMON history OID cross reference and Table B 15 for an RMON alarm OID cross reference 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 B 23 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 1 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 22 11 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 5 1 Link Speed MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifSpeed 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 All DLCI LMI Rx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag iflnOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 1 All DLCI LMI Tx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1
53. RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Possible Settings Local Disable Default Setting Disable Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the port s attached data terminal equipment using the port s interchange lead LL ITU 141 Local The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback Disable The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE Loopback 3 32 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring the ISDN BRI DBM Interface 9626 A2 GB20 00 For models with ISDN backup capability select Physical from the ISDN menu to configure the physical characteristics for the ISDN BRI DBM interface see Table 3 6 Main Menu Configuration ISDN Physical Table 3 6 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the ISDN interface is available for use Enable The ISDN interface is enabled Disable The ISDN interface cannot be configured nor can it transmit or receive data No PVC connections or frame relay DLCls will be deleted Disabling the ISDN interface results in the following m All currently connected ISDN calls are terminated Alarms or traps associated with this interface are not generated or displayed Originate or Answer Possible Se
54. Relay Services MIB ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String SifString up Network m iflndex RFC 1573 m linkDown LMI is down for the BRI AdminS LMI Protocol configured 3 or Synchronous z Bun Frame Relay link is disabled Data Port Strings m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 SifString LMI down DTE Side of the devLastTrapString ifString administratively Frame Relay UNI devHealthAndStatus shutdown Due to an Supported by the mib intentional shutdown media specific Frame m linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay DTE s MIB Relay link is enabled String SifString up 3 f the LMI Protocol is not configured a linkUp linkDown trap is based solely upon whether the interface is enabled or disabled B 12 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps enterprise Specific 9626 A2 GB20 00 These traps indicate that an enterprise specific event has occurred Supported enterprise specific traps are listed below Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 1 of 2 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause m devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib m devFrExtDiciDici devFrExt mib m devFrExtDIciCIR devFrExt mib m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib enterpriseCIR Change 15 CIR has changed due to t
55. SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and its IP address cannot be matched here access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is generated If a match is found the type of access read only or read write is determined by the corresponding Access Type Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the NMS IP address Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros Access Type Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command to the MIB objects This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands to the MIB objects However access for all read only objects is specified as read only 3 56 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out 9626 A2 GB20 00 Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to configure SNMP traps and dial out when a trap is generated see Table 3 16 Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt S
56. Size Bc Bits Possible Settings CIR Other Default Setting CIR Specifies whether the DLCI s committed burst size will follow the CIR or whether it will be entered independently This value is the maximum amount of data that the service provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval Tc CIR Uses the value in the CIR bps option as the committed burst size Bc The Bc and excess burst size Be options are updated when a CIR update is received from the network switch Other Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLCI When Other is selected the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained as well Possible Settings 0 64000 Default Setting 64000 Allows you to display or change the DLCI s committed burst size Display Conditions This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set to Other Excess Burst Size Bits Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the CIR without discarding frames Possible Settings 0 64000 Default Setting 0 Allows you to display or change the DLCI s excess burst size 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 39 Configuration Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options 3 of 3 DLCI Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting High Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device also known as quality of service All
57. Test Status The following information is included on this screen m Self Test Results Messages m Health and Status Messages m Test Status Messages Self Test Results Messages These self test result messages appear in the Self Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen Table 5 6 Self Test Results Messages Message What It Indicates What To Do Failure Xxxxxxxx An internal failure occurred 1 Record the failure code XXXxxxxx represents an l 8 digit hexadecimal failure 2 Reset the unit code used by service 3 Contact your service personnel representative Record the failure code before resetting the unit otherwise the error information will be lost Passed No problems were found No action needed during power on or reset March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance 9626 A2 GB20 00 Health and Status Messages These messages appear in the left column of the System and Test Status screen or on the last line at the bottom of the screen right corner When looking at the bottom of a screen only the highest priority Health and Status message appears Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 1 of 3 Message What It Indicates Auto Configuration Active Auto Configuration feature is active which allows automatic configuration and cross connection of DLCls as they are reported by the network LMI Back to Back Mode Active The operating mode has been configured for back to
58. Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN PVC Tests Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit If the unit does not have the ISDN DBM feature ISDN PVC Tests does not appear PVC Tests menu selections are suppressed when no PVCs have been configured on the interface Check that both ends of the cables are properly seated and secured Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane 5 x management solution using its Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface as well as from the menu driven user interface 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 6 15 Troubleshooting Test Timeout Feature DBM Tests 6 16 A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test as opposed to manually terminating a test after it has been running a specified period of time It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver unit is remotely managed through an inband data stream PVC If a test is accidently commanded to execute on the interface providing management access control is regained when the specified time period expires automatically terminating the test To use this feature enable the Test Timeout configuration option and set a duration for the test to run in the Test Duration min configuration option see Configuring General System Options in Chapter 3 Configuration NOTE These configuration options do
59. Transmit Clock Inv SPID Local Number Call ID Inverse ARP Invert Transmit Clock IP Address default destination 3 46 node information 3 45 Ping test 6 27 Validation NMS IP Address NMS number Node 3 45 IP addressing limiting SNMP access 9626 A2 GB20 00 Index ISDN Active 5 16 backup BRI DBM troubleshooting problems controlling access DBM connector DBM operation 5 47 Link Profile Invalid 5 16 6 8 Network Failed 5 16 6 8 physical options setting up link profiles 3 34 updating software 5 52 verifying line 5 48 K keyboard keys keys keyboard screen function L LADS LDM application 3 29 Lamp Test LAN adapter and cable Last Cause Value messages Latching Loopback latency 1 3 LEDs descriptions viewing limiting async terminal access dial in access FTP access SNMP access through IP addresses Telnet access Line Status 5 27 March 2000 IN 5 Index Link Destination 3 42 3 43 frame relay statistics Name 3 34 Operating Mode 5 27 Profile Disabled 5 16 6 8 Protocol 3 65 3 68 setting up ISDN profiles 3 34 Source 3 41 Status 3 34 Traps 3 59 Traps Interfaces 3 59 troubleshooting management TS Management 3 46 linkUp and linkDown events 3 59 traps B 9 LMI and PVC availability Behavior 3 24 Clearing Event N3 3 25 3 36 co
60. a non network ISDN DBM interface hhh mm ss indicates the number of hours maximum 255 minutes maximum 59 and seconds maximum 59 When 255 59 59 is exceeded the counter resets and begins the count again 5 16 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 3 of 3 Message What It Indicates LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface It clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 596 Possible reasons include m Network cable problem m Network facility problem Network Com Link Down The communication link for the COM port is down and the COM port is configured for Net Link No Signal at Network 1 A No Signal NS condition has been detected on hhh mm ss 3 the DDS network interface followed by the period of time that the condition has existed OOF at Network 1 hhh mm ss An Out of Frame OOF condition has been detected on the DDS network interface followed by the period of time that the condition has existed OOS at Network 1 hhh mm ss An Out of Service condition has been detected on the DDS network interface followed by the period of time that the condition has existed SLV Timeout DLCI nnnn An excessive number of SLV communication frame relay link 4 responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI the DLCI is n
61. an agent or DLCI 8 18 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices B gt Procedure 1 Select the Traffic radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCIs appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 If you want to monitor one of the agent s DLCls highlight the DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on an applicable icon The selected graphical report should open Traffic icons that would be of particular interest are Traffic Monitor and Domain History In the example below the Domain History icon was selected which is actually a real time report Net5cout RMON History Grenada43 File View Format Refresh Applications NetScout RMON History Grenadad3 Utilization 11 17 02 11 28 06 11 34 15 11 40 24 Mon Sep 14 NOTE If Size Distribution is the selected View and distribution size has been changed via OpenLane the values shown for the distribution will not be accurate Only default size distributions are tracked 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 8 19 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Statistical Windows Supported Not all icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window are supported for FrameSaver units For example All Convs conversations and TopNConv icons appear when the Protocol radio button is selected but conversations are not supported Of the ic
62. and access via the COM port is now available Session has been ended No action needed due to timeout CIR entered for the DLCl is Enter a valid CIR O 64000 a number greater than the maximum allowed Log on to the FrameSaver unit Value Out of Range Excess Burst Size entered Enter a valid Excess Burst Size for the DLCI is a number 0 1536000 greater than the maximum allowed DLCI Number entered is Enter a valid number less than 16 or greater than 16 1007 1007 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Status Information otatus information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit The following illustration shows the Status menu for the FrameSaver 9626 unit Status Menu main status 9626 Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 STATUS System and Test Status LMI Reported DLCIs PVC Connection Status Network Interface Status DBM Interface Status Performance Statistics Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit DBM Interface Status will not appear on the menu if the unit does not have a DBM NOTE Status messages contained in the following sections are in alphabetical order 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 13 Operation and Maintenance System and Test Status Messages 5 14 System and test status information is selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status System and
63. and are found in the OpenLane netscout userHistory directory The userHistory files should be moved to SNSHOME usr so they can be used A separate udh file must be created and loaded for each DLCI or link that will be monitored before a customized user history table can be loaded Use a text editor to create these udh files by m Copying one of the interface specific files DLCI or link and editing it using one of the examples provided as a guide m Copying one of the examples provided and editing the extensions to fit the FrameSaver unit CAUTION Two user history table files are already configured and installed in the unit UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 These files must not be modified These two tables are used to keep SLV data for reports It is always a good idea to rediscover agents and their DLCls before starting to be sure your agent and DLCI lists are current To rediscover agents and their DLCls select the Learn button on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected March 2000 8 13 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices B Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr 2 Copy an example or interface specific file to a new file that contains the user history table number 3 Open the new file using a text editor The variables in the file are listed with their OIDs Object IDs The frame relay interface number 101024001 must replace
64. are connected back to back without frame relay switches between them as in a test bench setup Changing Operating Mode When setting up back to back operation m One unit must be configured for Standard operation which is the setting for normal operation m The other unit must be configured for Back to Back operation so it presents the network side of the UNI user network interface Only one of the units will have its operating mode changed B Procedure To set up back to back operation 1 On the unit to be configured for Back to Back operation manually configure DLCIs DLCIs should be configured before connecting the two units 2 Access the Change Operating Mode screen Main Menu Control Change Operating Mode 3 Select Back to Back Operation and respond Yes to the Are you sure prompt 4 Save the change B Procedure To return the unit to normal operation 1 Return to the Change Operating Mode screen and switch back to Standard Operation 2 Respond Yes to the prompt and save the change The units can be reconnected to a standard frame relay network 3 22 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuration Option Tables Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order even though this may not be the order in which you access each when configuring the unit The following configuration option tables are included Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Tabl
65. back operation Main Menu Control gt Change Operating Mode The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch between them This feature is useful for product demonstrations or for a point to point configuration using a leased line Backup Active Backup has been established and data is flowing over the alternate DLCI Cross Pair Detection A cross pair condition has been detected on the DDS network interface Rx and Tx pair are reversed CTS down to Port 1 Device The user data port CTS control lead on the FrameSaver unit is off DLCI nnnn Down The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down frame relay link 1 2 DTR Down from Port 1 Device The DTR control lead from the device connected to the user data port is deasserted 1 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface March 2000 5 15 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 2 of 3 Message What It Indicates Excessive BPVs at Network 1 An excessive number of bipolar violations has hhh mm ss 3 been detected on the DDS network interface followed by the period of time that the condition has existed Caused when at least one invalid BPV has
66. bottom of the screen Clear Clears the phone number field so it can be reentered March 2000 3 33 Configuration Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles 3 34 For models with ISDN backup capability select ISDN Link Profiles from the ISDN menu to set up the ISDN Link Profiles see Table 3 7 Main Menu Configuration ISDN ISDN Link Profiles Table 3 7 ISDN Link Profile Options Link Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry HQ Site Default Setting HQ Site for first link blank for all others Assigns the name to the ISDN link profile It is generally the backup destination for a frame relay link Each profile must have a unique link name If the link name field is blank the link profile will be deleted Use ASCII text 8 characters maximum ASCII Text Entry Assigns a name to identify the ISDN link maximum 255 characters NOTE To prevent confusion do not use the following link names Network Net1 FR1 or Port 1 These names will be treated as nonunique HQ Site The link name configured in the remote site unit originating a backup call for the central site unit answering a backup call One link has a default value of HQ Site to allow for Automatic Backup Configuration Link Status Possible Settings Auto Disable Default Setting Auto Determines whether the ISDN Frame Relay link is in or out of service Auto The link is configured to be in service when needed Packets will be t
67. connection is configured between the network and port DLCIs Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 No management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI is configured for Port 1 user data A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCIs NetOnly Auto configuration of a network DLCI only no Port 1 or PVC connections are configured No Port 1 PVC connection or management DLCI is configured Disable No frame relay discovery or automatic configuration takes place The FrameSaver unit will be configured manually March 2000 3 11 Configuration NOTE If 1MPort the default is not the setting required for your application change the Frame Relay Discovery Mode before connecting the network cable or editing discovered option settings Otherwise the FrameSaver unit will start discovering DLCIs as soon as it powers up To recover from this problem edit a selected discovered DLCI or PVC connection manually if any DLCls or PVC Connections have been configured manually If only a local management PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit has been configured select the desired Frame Relay Discovery Mode and Save the change The default discovery mode is 1MPort management DLCls multiplexed with data DLCls on Port 1 which creates two embedded DLCIs EDLCIs one EDLCI for Port 1 user data and another EDLCI for management data that is for each DLCI discovered on the network a multiplexe
68. data on Port 1 is cut through as long as there is no higher priority data queued from another user port The DLCI priority set for an interface applies to data coming into that interface For example the priority set for DLCls on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment such as a router Display Conditions This option is not available for the network interface or if the model has ISDN backup capability an ISDN DBM interface Low Data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Data configured for the DLCI has high priority Outbound Management Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting Medium Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this DLCI to the network Display Conditions This option is not available on a user data port Low Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Management data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority 3 40 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring PVC Connections 9626 A2 GB20 00 The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures PVC Connections and their DLCI Records PVC Connections can also be created manually see Table 3 10 Main Menu Configuration PVC Connections From this screen you can
69. destinations are automatically configured using a separate ISDN Link Profile to backup each network PVC Connection and Management PVC over the ISDN interface All DLCIs are configured on the ISDN links using the same DLCI number as the network s DLCI Automatically created alternate destination Link Profiles appear as Bkupnnnn nnnn being the DLCI number e g Bkup200 would be configured for network DLCI 200 Disabled No automatic configuration takes place on the DBM interface and no alternate destinations are created for PVCs Since a central site DBM generally needs ISDN links for multiple remote sites and a remote site DBM only needs one ISDN link to the central site DBM this feature should be set to Multi Site Backup for a central site DBM configured to answer backup calls but set to Single Site Backup for a remote site DBM configured to originate a backup call Changes must be saved to take effect See Setting Up Auto Configuration to see a screen example March 2000 3 15 Configuration When the Automatic Backup Configuration setting is changed the following prompts appear No is the default for these prompts If you select m No No Auto Configuration updates are performed and The following prompt When the appears Automatic Backup Configuration setting Saving will cause Auto Configuration was changed and Save was selected Response to the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections
70. display add or change SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver unit to set up trap managers see Table 3 15 Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP Table 3 15 SNMP NMS Security Options NMS IP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Only allows access when the sending manager s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen Enable Performs security checks Disable Does not perform security checks Number of Managers ET MM Number of Managers Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit An IP address must be configured for each management system allowed to send messages Configure IP addresses in the NMS n IP Address configuration option 1 10 Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit If an
71. document numbers Select the appropriate document In addition to installation instructions these documents include instructions for m Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services Accessing the OpenLane application m Adding a FrameSaver device m Adding a Customer ID The OpenLane SLM System has an extensive Help system For additional information refer to the following sources For UNIX users Refer to the readme txt file for distributed infrastructure details and the online Help for operational details For Windows NT users Refer to the online Help Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support 7 2 With the OpenLane SLM system s extensive online Help system the application is self documenting and you have access to the most current system information B Procedure To set up FrameSaver SLV support 1 Start the OpenLane services then access the application 2 Enter a Customer ID for access to customer profiles frame relay access facilities components and PVC components Add FrameSaver devices Create customer profiles Set up historical data collection Oo oa A C Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data See the Quick Start Installation Instructions to learn how to perform these steps and for additional information March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices This chapter includes NetScout Manager Plus information as i
72. far end FrameSaver device 1 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu 5 Test gt IP Ping 2 Enter the IP Address of the device the Ping is being sent to then select Start NOTE If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized or the far end device has just initialized it may take about a minute for the units to learn the routes via the proprietary RIP While the test is running In Progress isdisplayed in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing will be required 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 6 27 Troubleshooting Lamp Test 6 28 B gt Procedure 2 To Ping the NMS at the central site 1 Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 2 Verify that the central site NMS s router has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 3 Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap Manager if the router is to route data so a route has been configured within the FrameSaver unit Main Menu 5 Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps Or for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router verify that a Default IP Destination route has been confi
73. feature 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 6 5 Troubleshooting Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log Once the capture buffer or trace log is full the oldest packets are overwritten To view the most recently captured packets using the menu driven user interface LMI Packet Capture Utility Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log Example main control lmi capture display log 9626 Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 LMI TRACE LOG Page 1 of 3 Packets Transmitted to Netl FR Packets Received from Net1 FR1 LMI Record 1 at Os Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rcv Seq 177 LMI Record 2 at 0 s Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rcv Seq 177 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp PgDn Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI messages The following information is provided m The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet 1 8000 and the amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured The maximum amount of time displayed is 4 294 967 seconds s which is reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded m The type of message either Status or Status Enquiry from th
74. frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN The frame relay link specified or models with an ISDN DBM on a non network DBM interface A nonlatching loopback can only be initiated and terminated by the network service provider March 2000 5 19 Operation and Maintenance Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status 5 20 Network LMI reported DLCI statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status LMI Reported DLCIs The LMI Reported DLCls screen displays the status and CIR if supported by the switch for each DLCI whether the DLCI is configured or not LMI Reported DLCIs Status Screen Example main status lmi dlcis Device Name Node A DLCI 300 305 400 410 411 420 430 501 511 520 DLCI is configured on the Frame Relay Link Refresh PgUp STATUS Active Inactive Deleted Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Inactive Active Active PgDn frame relay link LMI REPORTED DLCIs CIR bps 16000 256000 64000 STATUS Active Active Deleted Active Active Active ESC for previous menu PrevLink 9626 05 26 1999 23 32 Page 1 of 2 CIR bps 32000 32000 32000 32000 32000 MainMenu Exit An asterisk 7 next to the DLCI indicates that the DLCI has been configured for the link DLCls without an asterisk
75. is incorporated in the unit s software A separate download to update DBM functionality is not necessary 5 52 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Determining Whether a Download Is Completed To see whether a download has completed check the Identity screen Main Menu Status Identity Check Alternate Software Rev under the NAM Identity column m f a software revision number appears the file transfer is complete M fIn Progress appears the file is still being transferred f Invalid appears no download has occurred or the download was not successful Changing Software Once a software upgrade is downloaded it needs to be activated When activated the unit resets then executes the downloaded software With this feature you control when the upgrade software is implemented B gt Procedure To switch to the new software 1 Go to the Control menu and select Select Software Release Main Menu Control Select Software Release The currently loaded software version and the new release that was just transferred are shown If the download failed Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field instead of the new release number Repeat the procedure in Upgrading System Software if this occurs 2 Select Switch amp Reset 3 Enter Yes to the Are you sure prompt The unit resets and begins installing the newly transferred software 4 Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the C
76. mib E Tag devRmonIPTopNDStIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 13 1 2 1 6 H T N IP Top Talkers 1 6 MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devRmonIPTopNSrcIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 3 1 D DLCI CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciFrCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 7 1 D MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlIci TXDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 8 1 D Tx BECNs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrCircuitTxBECN 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 1 D Rx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Network Frames Lost MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 22 1 D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 37 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciRmtOffFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 39 1 D Network Frames Offered In CIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFrinCir Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 B 25 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Al
77. not pertain to tests commanded by the DTE like a DTE initiated External Loopback The Test menu allows you to run PVC loopbacks and test patterns on the unit and its DBM interface It is available to users with a security access level of 1 or 2 Currently there are no physical tests for a BRI DBM interface DBM tests are started and monitored the same as the network tests See System and Test Status Messages in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for ISDN backup related test messages appearing on the System and Test Status screen See PVC Tests on page 6 19 for additional information March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Starting and Stopping a Test Use this procedure to start monitor or abort specific tests To abort all active tests on all interfaces see Aborting All Tests When the status of a testis The only command available is Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure B Procedure To start and stop a loopback or a set pattern test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 2 Select an interface and test e g Network Data Port or ISDN PVC Tests and press Enter The selected test screen appears Start appears in the Command column Inactive appears in the Status column 3 Select the Port number and press Enter 4 Select the DLCI number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available t
78. or originating side see the Originate or Answer configuration option for the ISDN physical interface options see Configuring the ISDN BRI DBM Interface in Chapter 3 Configuration 3 Verify that backup is taking place see Verifying That Backup Can Take Place NOTE When an alarm requiring backup is received backup can be manually controlled by enabling or disabling the Auto Backup option see Step 2 4 Have the far end network cable reconnected to return to standard operation 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 47 Operation and Maintenance Manually Placing a Call Nondisruptive Use this procedure to test the ISDN path to each remote site This procedure will not put the system into backup B gt Procedure 1 Make sure the ISDN Link Profiles and DLCls are set up correctly at both the originating and answering devices see Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles in Chapter 3 Configuration Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN Link Profiles Main Menu Configuration ISDN DLCI Records 2 Place a Test Call originating side Main Menu Test gt ISDN Call PVC Tests Select the link to be tested Start a Test Call The Status should be Active If the Result is Then Frame Relay Link Up The call was successful Frame Relay Link Down The call was unsuccessful Verify the configuration and Link Status in the ISDN Link Profile Select Stop to end the Test Call Verifying ISDN Lines Use eithe
79. provisioned for two B channels 1 Verify that the Inbound Calling ID has been defined 2 Verify that the Inbound Calling ID is part of your service No action is needed Contact your service representative Contact your service representative Contact your service representative 9626 A2 GB20 00 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 13 Last Cause Value Messages 3 of 6 Cause Message NO Invalid Number 28 Format Incomplete Address Invalid Transit 91 Network Selection Mandatory 96 Information Element Missing Message Not 101 Compatible with Call State 98 Msg Type 97 Nonexistent or Unimplemented Msg Nonexistent Network Out of 38 Order No Call Suspended 85 No Circuit Channel Available No Destination 3 Houte None What It Indicates Call cannot be completed because the phone number is incorrect or incomplete Incorrect format of transit network identification Required data is missing from a mandatory information element Device sending this cause has received a message that is not permissible while in the call state An unexpected message was received in a state other than Null Device sending this cause has received a nonexistent or not implemented message type while in the call state Device sending this cause has received a status message that indicates an incompatible call state Network is not functioning correctly an
80. reset from the OpenLane system Firmware downloading provides an easy to use tool for downloading to an entire network or a portion of the network On demand polling of FrameSaver devices and SNMP polling and reporting are available 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 1 5 About the FrameSaver SLV 9626 1 6 NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probe Support Provides complete LAN and WAN traffic analysis and monitoring functions for FrameSaver SLV devices The following features are supported using this application Thresholds for RMON 1 Remote Monitoring Version 1 alarms and events can be configured Performance monitoring can be performed using collected RMON 2 Version 2 data NetScout Manager Plus s Protocol Directory and Distribution functionality allows FrameSaver devices to measure up to eleven network layer protocols and report the amount of traffic generated by each Its IP Top Talkers and Listeners reporting identifies the devices using network bandwidth for traffic and protocol analysis identifying the network s top six users In addition it collects performance statistics from FrameSaver devices Up to 900 samples can be stored in 15 minute buckets with 96 buckets in a 24 hour period for up to five days worth of data Optional standalone NetScout Probes can be used with FrameSaver devices at sites where full 7 layer monitoring an unlimited number of protocols and advanced frame capture and decode capab
81. specified for the reporting period These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health Index rating See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index ratings All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports Reports Applicable to SLV Devices 9626 A2 GB20 00 The following frame relay reports support FrameSaver SLV units Exception Reports Provide summary and detail information that identifies DLCls with the highest incidence of errors high bandwidth utilization and trends These reports identify those DLCIs that have exceeded a specified number of accumulated exception points It is a good idea to run this report daily so that DLCIs having the most problems can be attended to first DLCIs contained on this report need immediate attention If a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports check whether any new equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly configured If its configuration is correct the equipment could be faulty Summary Reports Provide summary information for the network volume and error leaders and DLCI traffic Network Summary Report Provides an overall view of the network Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into problems Leaders Summary Report Identifies DLCIs having the highest volume and errors High traffic volume may be increasing latency and the high Health In
82. test statistics DBM call elements uploading to an NMS 5 54 IN 10 March 2000 Status DBM interface 5 26 DLCI Enquiry LMI 3 25 3 36 information 5 13 LED 5 5 Line 5 27 menu branch Network interface PVC connection Stop Bits 3 63 stopping a test Subnet Mask 3 49 3 64 Subnet Mask 3 68 3 69 Node 3 45 suggestions user documentation A summary network report switching between screen areas to new software System and test status messages configuring options displaying information Frame Relay and LMI options 3 24 General options 3 28 messages Name Contact and Location setting the clock data amp time 3 8 T T1 LMI Heartbeat 3 25 3 36 T2 LMI Inbound Heartbeat 3 25 3 37 T3 LMI N4 Measurement Period 3 25 3 37 Tab key Te 3 39 TCP Telnet limiting access Session user interface options Terminal Port Use 3 62 13 66 Test Call menu branch Mode Status messages 9626 A2 GB20 00 Tests aborting 6 18 available 6 15 Connectivity DBM DTE Loopback 6 26 Duration 3 28 IP Ping 6 27 Lamp 6 28 messages 5 18 physical 6 23 PVC 6 19 PVC Loopback 6 20 send Monitor Pattern starting or stopping Test Call Timeout 3 28 16 16 through PVC connections total number throughput time setting 3 8 Timeout Inactivity 3 54 8 64 3 67
83. the cursor is on Move cursor up one field within a column on the same screen Move cursor down one field within a column on the same screen Move cursor one character to the right if in edit Move cursor one character to the left if in edit mode Redraw the screen display clearing information typed in but not yet entered Accept entry or when pressed before entering data or after entering invalid data display valid options on the last row of the screen 9626 A2 GB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation Function Keys 9626 A2 GB20 00 All function keys located in the lower part of the screen see the example on page 2 5 operate the same way throughout the screens They are not case sensitive so upper or lowercase letters can be used interchangeably These keys use the following conventions For the screen Select function And press Enter to M orm MainMenu Return to the Main Menu screen Eore Exit Terminate the asynchronous terminal session Norn Enter new data Lor Delete Delete data Sors Save Save information Rorr Refresh Update screen with current information Corc ClrStats Clear network performance statistics and refresh the screen Variations include m CIrSLV8DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI Statistics m ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics m CIrDBMStats for clearing DBM call statistics Uoru PgUp Display the previous page
84. unit is an RJ11 6 position 4 contact unkeyed modular jack The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Standard RJ11 Modular Cable A standard straight through modular cable is used to connect the FrameSaver unit s internal modem to the dial service No special order cables are required 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 C 5 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments ISDN BRI DBM Connector For the FrameSaver unit with the built in ISDN BRI DBM the backup connection is through the DBM interface connector which is an 8 position unkeyed modular jack The following table shows pin assignments for the DBM interface and the purpose of each Function Circuit Direction Pin Number BRI Transmit Receive Ring DBM4 To From 4 Local Loop BRI Transmit Receive Tip DBM5 To From 5 Local Loop ISDN Modular Cable The ISDN cable comes with the FrameSaver unit ordered with the DBM feature C 6 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Technical Specifications Table D 1 FrameSaver SLV 9626 Technical Specifications 1 of 2 Specification Approvals FCC Part 15 FCC Part 68 Industry Canada Safety Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration Power Consumption and Dissipation Built in power cord 120 Vac power supply consumption Physical Dimensions Height Width Depth Criteria Class A digital device Refer to the equipment s label for the Regi
85. 1 D Tx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 I D Frames Received 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 6 2 1 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 2 1 1 9 l Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn dds mib E Tag ddsUnavailableSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Exceeding CIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Frames Dropped by Network MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag frFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 I D Missing Latency Responses MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciMissedSL Vs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Congested Seconds MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsCongestedSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg B 28 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 Alarm OID Cross Reference 2 of 2 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6
86. 12 most recent LMI messages can be displayed from the menu driven user interface m Configuration Upload Download and Software Download Capability Provides quick transfer of configuration options to and from nodes and software downloads while the unit is running using the standard File Transfer Protocol FTP Two software images can be stored m Dual Flash Memory Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and running Two software loads can be stored and implemented at the user s discretion m Integral Modem Provides an internal 14 4 kbps modem to support dialing in to the unit for out of band management and automatic dialing out of SNMP traps m Optional ISDN Backup Capability For the FrameSaver 9626 model with a built in ISDN BRI DBM Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface Dial Backup Module Provides automatic dial backup through the ISDN for data when primary frame relay network or access line failures occur then automatically restores data to the primary route when service returns to normal Supports alarm generation and call security as well Provides automatic configuration of an alternate route and DLCI for automatically created PVCs at either the remote site or central site When the automatic backup feature is enabled backup and restoration occur automatically Alarm generation and call security are also supported by units with ISDN backup capability When the SLV Sample Interval is set
87. 55 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM port Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the COM port which you can View or edit Clear Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the IP Address is all zeros the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 3 64 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 17 Communication Port O
88. 573 Tag ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Rx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 12 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 12 2 1 2 P Protocol Octets MIB RMON II RFC 2021 for 11 for 11 protocols Tag protocolDistStatsOctets 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T 2 The time mask B 24 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 2 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 2 1 1 9 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn dds mib E Tag ddsUnavailableSecs 1 8 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Non octet Aligns MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 13 1 2 1 4 H T N IP Top Listeners 1 6 MIB pdn FrExt
89. A2 GB20 00 Configuration Restricting Automatic Backup You can specify when auto backup is allowed to occur on units configured to originate calls If backup is restricted and a backup is active when the allowed time for backups is over then the backup is terminated and the data is returned to the primary data path regardless of the primary path s condition You can restrict auto backup to occur only m On certain days of the week m At certain times of the day B gt Procedure To set the criteria for automatic backup 1 Enable Auto Backup Main Menu Configuration Auto Backup Criteria When a failure occurs the unit automatically enables the Alternate Link and traffic is rerouted over the backup alternate interface 2 Specify When Auto Backup Allowed Always or Restrict If Restrict is selected specify the days and hours of the week during which automatic backup can take place 3 Save the configuration See Table 3 19 Auto Backup Criteria Options for configuration information Configuring the DBM Interface to Send SNMP Traps The ISDN DBM interface can be specified as an interface that monitors and generates SNMP traps Main Menu Configuration Management and Communications gt SNMP Traps The configuration options for doing this include m Link Trap Interfaces m DLCI Traps on Interfaces When DBM is selected trap messages are generated for linkUp and linkDown events on DLCIs and frame relay lin
90. A2 GB20 00 Installation and Setup of Network Health and reports Discovering FrameSaver Elements Configuring the Discovered Elements Grouping Elements for Reports Generating Reports for a Group About Service Level Heports About At a Glance Reports About Trend Reports Printed Reports Reports Applicable to SLV Devices March 2000 9 1 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices For additional information about installing accessing and managing FrameSaver SLV devices through Concord s Network Health and for information about applicable reports refer to m Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application m Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application m Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay reports m Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand and use Traffic Accountant reports Installation and Setup of Network Health Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions and follow the instructions applicable to your network platform Once Network Health is installed you need to set up the application so it will support FrameSaver units Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions called a module Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those features and functions Make sure you license the Poller application so yo
91. Alarm Defaults 0 a B 17 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 0 0a B 18 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area B 20 DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area B 21 m Object ID Cross References Numeric Order B 23 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 vii Contents C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments lH Aea PNG aecosassidd Xu demi d equa BG Eck d OE oC KA ORE UR d eon C 1 m COM Port Connector aa BAKA KAKA KKK KA KK KRAS ok aci kde C 2 LAN Adapter Converter and Cable C 3 S DIE PEN CO BOLOE 5 6 a xcd up ole ob nG bon hao C 4 Standard V 35 Straight Through Cable C 4 m DDS Network Connector lueleeeeeee n C 5 DDS Network Cable Feature No 3600 F3 501 C 5 m Modem Connector aaa kA Yap RA EROR E EAR DANGAN NGA Rer as C 5 Standard RJ11 Modular Cable 0 0 ccc eee eee C 5 E ISON BRI DBM Connector 2 1m exe EO econ RO oe ORE C 6 ISDN A LSU a dicii dd daos uci scie de ded doe Eccl dead C 6 D Technical Specifications E Equipment List E 5 5 uade esi 8 bap dE ER E eo Mb CR I AT E 1 BG SPD SEE RA AA AA E 2 Index viii March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 About This Guide Section Description Chapter 7 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices ldentifies where installation and setup information is located and how FrameSaver units are supported Chapter 8 Sett
92. Connections are deleted except for Management PVCs with the user data port as the primary destination and the Management PVC that is designated as TS Management Link f No is entered previously discovered and auto configured option settings will not be removed but configuration updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the just saved mode setting If No n is entered or if you exit the screen without responding to the prompt no Auto Configuration updates are performed and updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting Automatically Removing a Circuit 9626 A2 GB20 00 Using the automatic circuit removal feature which comes enabled network DLCIs and PVCs can be automatically removed from the unit s configuration when the the network service provider no longer supports them Automatic deletion is based upon information from a LMI full status response on an active frame relay link When this feature is set to Enable The following will be automatically removed from the unit s configuration Unsupported network DLCIs and PVC connections that include multiplexed network DLCIs Unsupported standard network DLCls that are not configured as the primary destination in a management PVC Non management PVCs in which unsupported standard network DLCIs are included DLCls not included in three consecutive LMI full status response messages
93. Current date in the month daylyear format mmiddiyyyy date in the Current date in the month daylyear format mmiddiyyyy format mm dd yyyy Time Current time in the hours minutes format hh mm ss NOTE To clear existing information place the cursor in the Clear field Tab to the Clear field and press Enter See Chapter 4 Security and Logins to set up and administer logins 3 8 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Setting Up the Modem The unit has an internal modem for dial in access to the menu driven user interface as well as dial out capability when an SNMP trap is generated When the modem will be used to dial out Modem Directory phone numbers need to be set up Otherwise simply configure or change dial in access to the unit The modem port is already configured for connection to an asynchronous terminal and dial in access with Port Use set to Terminal However additional changes may be needed see Table 3 18 Modem Port Options Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port For dial in access to the menu driven user interface via Telnet make sure Port Use is set to Net Link the IP address and subnet mask are entered if they are different from the node s and that the Link Protocol is correct See Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out when trap dial out is desired See Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port in Chapter 4 Security and Logins for additional inf
94. D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Rx Non octet Aligns MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs Tag devFrExtLinkRx 15 mins NonOctet OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs 15 mins Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Tag devFrExtLinkTotal Ce Rs LMIErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 in the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 B 19 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area These alarms apply to all DLCls on the network interface and can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are put into the Paradyne alarm area Table B 11 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID Interval Default Default DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactive 15 mins Secs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D 900 secs 15 mins Missing Latency Responses MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciMissedSLVs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 I D Rx FECNs MIB
95. DCLB Active Interface A V 54 Loopback is active on the specified interface DSU Loopback Active Network 1 A Data Service Unit DSU Loopback a Local Loopback back to the network is currently running on the network interface DTE External LB Active Port 1 An external DTE Loopback is running on the user data port DTE Init Ext LB Active Interface The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback on the specified port DTE Initiated Ext LB Port 1 The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback on Port 1 Lamp Test Active The Lamp Test is active causing the LEDs on the faceplate to flash on and off Latching DSU LB Active A network initiated latching DSU Loopback is Network 1 currently running on a 64 kbps clear channel circuit The DSU Latching Loopback 64K CC option must be enabled Main Menu Configuration Network Physical Monitor Pttn Active DLCI nnmn The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the frame relay link 1 specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link Monitor Pttn Active Interface A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified interface This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN The f
96. DDR statistics collection is included with each frame which is used at the receiving end to determine the amount of data dropped by the network Disable Extra byte is not included DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Available Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether missed SLV packets will be monitored along with the LMI status to determine the status of PVC connections to remote FrameSaver units NOTE This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCIs connected to a far end unit with hardware bypass capability Enable After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded causing the DLCl s status to turn Inactive an alarm and SNMP trap are generated and a Health and Status message created Disable Missed SLV communications will not be monitored SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 3 Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV communications that must be detected before a DLCI Inactive status is declared 1 20 Sets the limit for these error events 3 26 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options 2 of 2 SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the DLCI Inactive status is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event
97. DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network provider or your ISDN service provider if an ISDN Link Name is the link DTR Down from The DTR control lead on Examine the attached DTE and Port 1 Device the device connected to cable connected to the system s Port n is disasserted port The DTR control lead on m Check that the port cable is the device connected to the securely attached at both specified port is off This ends Bons Te eee m Check the status of the l attached equipment Excessive BPVs at An excessive number of m Verify that the network cable is Network 1 bipolar violations has been securely attached at both hhh mm ss 3 detected on the DDS ends network interface followed by the period of time that the condition has existed m Contact your network provider Caused when at least one invalid BPV has occurred every 20 ms for 2 seconds nnmn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface hhh mm ss indicates the number of hours maximum 255 minutes maximum 59 and seconds maximum 59 When 255 59 59 is exceeded the counter resets and begins the count again March 2000 6 7 Troubleshootin
98. DN BRI DBM Interface o oo Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles iade vas r era Rr Euro 3 34 Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface 3 35 Manually Configuring DLCI Records 2 0 aaa 3 38 m Configuring PVC Connections 0 ec 3 41 li March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Contents m Setting Up Management and Communication Options 3 44 Configuring Node IP Information a 3 45 Configuring Management PVCs 2 2 2 3 48 Configuring General SNMP Management 3 52 Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support 3 53 Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options aa 3 56 Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out 3 57 Configuring the Communication Port aaa 3 62 Configuring the Modem Port 4s nici hs acid CLR eid uires 3 66 m Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup 3 70 4 Security and Logins BE EUIS ausrdeead 3 du ey qa ud 3i aebantqu s dba AA 4 2 m Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access 4 2 m Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port 000 eee 4 4 m Controlling ISDN Access 0 e 4 4 DON DAI SSOUIIV amp s pka nG 254 PERTPIRELP E EE PRETI PEIQPRESd4 4 4 Disabling ISDN Access aaa cbe m Amba ede pcr e ions 4 4 m Controlling Telnet or FTP Access ccc eens 4 5 Limiting Telnet Access AA Rad ERREU
99. FrameSaver SLV 9626 USER S GUIDE Document No 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 KANADINA on Copyright 2000 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales Service and Training Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation training distributor lo
100. Identified Channel Does Not Exist Info Element Nonexistent or Nonimplemented Interworking Unspecified Invalid Call Reference Value Invalid Info Element Contents Invalid Message Unspecified 5 30 99 127 81 100 95 What It Indicates Requested facility is not provided by the network Called user is not permitted to accept the call Request to establish a call has been received but low layer high layer or another compatibility attribute e g data rate cannot be provided Incorrect format of the destination link Channel requested for a call is not activated on the interface Device sending this cause has received a message it does not recognize This cause will not prevent the message from being precessed Precise cause of a message cannot be determined because the interworking network does not provide causes Call reference used is not currently in use on the user network interface Device sending this cause has received and implemented an information element but one or more fields in the element cannot be processed No other cause in the invalid message class applies for this invalid message event March 2000 No action is needed What To Do Turn off network call screening Arrange for the desired capability Make sure the network is configured for 2B service if a BRI DBM Contact your service provider to verify that your service is
101. Lane provides a template for configuring alarms DLCI alarms can be configured manually but using the Paradyne alarm defaults template greatly reduces configuration time The following alarms are configured for each DLCI included in the Paradyne MIB Frames Sent SL VFramesSnt Rx DLCI Utilization SLVrxDLCIUtil Tx CIR Utilization SLVTxCIRUtil Frames Sent Above CIR SLVFramesTxAbvCIR Tx DLCI Utilization SLVTxDLCIUtil Average Latency AverageLatency Frames Received SLVFramesRec Current Latency CurrentLatency These alarms and current values can be found in NSHOME usr slvtemplate fct which is used as a starting point for loading new alarms This file can be copied and edited so the alarm threshold values match service level agreement values The copied fct file can then be used to replicate alarm threshold values for all DLCls on the unit using the eztrap utility All fct files must be in NSHOME usr To configure alarms manually see Adding SLV Alarms Manually NOTE Perl must be installed in your system to use the eztrap utility in the procedure below If you have an NT system please install Perl before proceeding B Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr 2 Type eztrap i filename fct o agentname fct agentname and press Enter to run the eztrap utility to create alarm threshold values across all DLCls for the copied fct file The message eztrap done appears whe
102. Level 1 access or you may be inadvertently locked out NOTE See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertently 3 Save your changes When Save is complete the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field ready for another entry Security is enabled by the configuration options Login Required for the communication port modem port and Telnet Login Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 4 11 Security and Logins See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about security configuration options Modifying a Login Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect login and creating a new one Deleting a Login B Procedure To delete a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu Control Administer Logins 2 Page through login pages records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys until the login to be deleted is displayed 3 Select Delete 4 Save your deletion When the deletion is complete the number of login pages records reflects one less record and the record before the deleted record reappears Example Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3 4 12 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance This chapter includes the following information m Displaying System Information m Viewing LEDs and Control Leads LED Des
103. MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB Support The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP Version 1 and has the capability of being managed by any industry standard SNMP manager and accessed by external SNMP managers using the SNMP protocol The following MIBs are supported MIB II RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 m Frame Relay DTEs MIB RFC 2115 m RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 m Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 m Enterprise MIB m ISDN MIB RFC 2127 m RMON Version 1 MIB RFC 1757 m RMON Version 2 MIB RFC 2021 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World Wide Web site B Procedure To access Paradyne MIBs 1 Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com 2 Select Technical Support 3 Select Management Information Base MIBs The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS application software Refer to your browser or NMS manual for additional download information B 2 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults System Group mib 2 This MIB provides the system description and system object identifier for the oystem Group for the FrameSaver 9626 unit which is an SNMPv1 MIB FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 The following is the system description sysDescr system 1 for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver 9626 unit PARADYNE DDS FrameSaver SLV Model 9626 S W Release MM mm bb
104. NMP Traps See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for trap format standards and special trap features including RMON specific traps and the default settings that will generate RMON specific SNMP traps Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 1 of 5 SNMP Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Number of Trap Managers Possible Settings 1 6 Default Setting 1 Number of Trap Managers Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap messages from the FrameSaver unit An NMS IP Address must be configured in the NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages 1 6 Specifies the number of trap managers inclusive NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager s to receive SNMP traps Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap manager Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros March 2000 3 57 Config
105. OpenLane netscout userHistory directory These files should be moved to SNSHOME usr so they can be used See Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template and Creating History Files for additional information 8 2 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 9626 A2 GB20 00 For the NetScout Manager Plus main window to appear make sure your environment is set up exactly as specified in your NetScout Readme file You need to m Copy the OpenLane directory to a user directory m Add frame relay agents to the NetScout Manager m Configure agent properties m Verify and correct domains and groups m Monitor the agent and DLCIs Refer to the NetScout documentation for additional information about accessing and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through NetScout Manager Plus refer to the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide to help you install the application monitor traffic and diagnose emerging problems on network segments NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to help you configure agents remote servers and report templates using the various NetScout products NetScout Probe User Guide to help you install the NetScout Probe between the FrameSaver unit and its router and configure the probe on network segments you want to monitor March 2000 8 3 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the
106. Port S01P1 All tests have been halted on an interface or virtual circuit String testString test stopped on ifString e g Disruptive PVC Loopback test stopped on DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay 9626 A2 GB20 00 Traps RMON Specific 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON See RMON Alarm and Event Defaults for the default values that will generate RMON specific traps Table B 8 RMON Specific Traps and Variable Bindings risingAlarm fallingAlarm Variable Bindings m alarmindex RFC 1757 m alarmVariable RFC 1757 alarmSampleType RFC 1757 m alarmValue RFC 1757 m alarmRisingThreshold or alarm Falling Threshold RFC 1757 m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib March 2000 Possible Cause Object being monitored has risen above the set threshold String Change in variableName typeString threshold of SalarmRising Threshold by S alarmValue AlarmRisingThreshold e g Octets received on Network DDS frame relay rose to threshold of 1 Object being monitored has fallen below the set threshold String Change in variableName typeString threshold of alarmFallingThreshold by alarmValue AlarmFalling Threshold e g Octets received on Network DDS frame relay fell to threshold o
107. R ERR AGE sand 4 5 Limiting FTP ACCESS AP Rack boh teed PBB PAA elude seeds 4 6 Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link 4 7 Controlling SNMP Access aaa ees enn 4 8 Disabling SNMP AOBBSS AT 4 8 Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels 4 9 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 4 10 m Creating ALON osenscaemsenemecexesuprecrpskex qeu mS4ue Rm eua PEERS 4 11 KONG LOG N TTL 4 12 sf lie PM LA dett oed AA AA 4 12 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 iii Contents 5 Operation and Maintenance m Displaying System Information 2 aaa np AGA BB exe edm ARR 5 9 m Viewing LEDs and Control Leads 2 0 c cece eens 5 4 LED DONA Ieee ee eee eee krins ku eS eee Se es eS YES D 5 Control Lead Descriptions a 5 7 LENG ax adu acea AN aes db iae AKA d i a d Gros dado GN ees 5 8 E Status InidrmisliilT acus vecta died aon iO RE RHOD AGI odo o Reb NAGA we 5 13 System and Test Status Messages 5 14 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status aaa 5 20 FVOOCoOnnecgBp ID ii ug MG clos o acd GNG c ca AA ees 5 22 Network Interface Status a 5 25 DBM Interface Status eoeseedceiseselirbsrirteeressqgeisssries ess 5 26 Last Cause Value Messages 00 0a 5 29 m Performance Statistics ersarribmaewild a id Reli 4gibdarii vtifkss 5 35 Clearing Performance Statistics eee eens 5 36 Service Level Verification P
108. Received The number of forward explicit congestion notifications received over the interface The network sends FECNS to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator BECNs Received The number of backward explicit congestion notifications received over the interface The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BEON indicator Frame Relay Errors Total Errors The number of total frame relay errors excluding LMI errors Short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors are included in this total Indicates that there may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link or the units at either the far end or both ends of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid Rx Frames The number of invalid frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface There is a non frame relay device on the other end of the link March 2000 5 41 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 16 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 2 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Errors cont d The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were less than 5 octets five 8 bit bytes in length Short Rx Frames There may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1
109. Setting Initially blank no default opecifies the alternate EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected for the frame relay link EDLCIs identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCIs that are unique to those DLCIs Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCIs Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear unless ISDN backup is available and the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses the EDLCI field 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number inclusive 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 51 Configuration Configuring General SNMP Management 3 52 Select General SNMP Management to add change or delete the information needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the NMS supporting the SNMP protocols see Table 3 13 Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management Table 3 13 General SNMP Management Options SNMP Management Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP compatible NMS Enable C
110. Test timing transmit 3 29 trademarks A Training A transferring data Transmit Clock Invert 3 31 Source 3 31 Transmit Timing Trap Dial Out 3 60 Disconnect Managers Number of Traps authentificationFailure DLCI Enterprise Specific 3 58 B 13 General Link Link Interfaces 3 59 linkUp and linkDown RMON RMON Specific B 15 SNMP and dial out options standards supported warmstart 9626 A2 GB20 00 Index Trend report 9 7 troubleshooting creating a management link device problems 6 11 frame relay PVC problems ISDN BRI DBM problems 6 14 management link tables 6 11 TruePut 1 2 TS Management Link Access Level 3 47 access level limiting Telnet access TST LED TXD control lead Type Access U UNI 1 2 3 25 3 36 3 37 upgrading BRI software system software upload download capability uploading data user history adding files 8 13 installing files 8 15 monitoring DLCI 8 16 statistics gathering user interface cannot be accessed communication port options resetting restoring access Telnet session user defined history 4 7 March 2000 IN 11 Index V W V 35 warmStart connector events General Traps straight through cable trap V 54 Loopback warranty A Value Out of Range message Web site variable bindings B 10 B 15 access to documentation VCI 1 5 glossa
111. This test logically not physically loops back frames received from another FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device Main Menu Test Network PVC Tests PVC Loopback Network PVC Loopback PVC x Network PVC x 98 16186 Main Menu Test gt Data Port PVC Tests PVC Loopback Port PVC Loopback DTE PVC x PVC x Network C ER oes Sc 98 16187 Main Menu gt Test ISDN PVC Tests PVC Loopback ISDN PVC Loopback Network 98 16188 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Send Pattern Monitor Pattern 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting This test sends packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To send a pattern test on a link Main Menu Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN PVC Tests Send Pattern If the selected And the default DLCIis configured as Then Rate kbps setting is Standard Disruptive appears 10096 of CIR after Test Multiplexed Non Disruptive 1096 of CIR appears after Test If the CIR is zero the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps Monitor Pattern monitors packets for the hexadecimal 55 test pattern between two FrameSaver devices and checks sequence numbers using a patented proprietary method To monitor a pattern test on a link Main Menu Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN
112. a Ports Physical Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 1 of 2 Transmit Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Determines whether the DTE s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by its internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE NOTE Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any physical port tests including any DTE initiated loopback tests Internal The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing TXC DCE source for timing the incoming data External The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data and the FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC DTE source for timing the incoming data Invert Transmit Clock Possible Settings Auto Enable Disable Default Setting Auto Determines whether the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE Source TXC is phase inverted with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data TD Auto The port will check the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC on this port If necessary the port will automatically phase invert the clock with respect to the transmitted data Enable Phase inverts the TXC clock Use this setting when long cable lengths betw
113. a Save Message Area Menu Path Menu selections made to reach the current screen Device Name Customer assigned identification of the FrameSaver unit Screen Area Selection display and input fields for monitoring and maintaining the FrameSaver unit Function Keys Area Specific functions that can be performed by pressing a specified key then pressing Enter Message Area System related information and valid settings for input fields in the lower left corner System and Test Status messages in the lower right corner 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 2 5 User Interface and Basic Operation Navigating the Screens Keyboard Keys 2 6 You can navigate the screens by m Using keyboard keys m Switching between the two screen work areas using function keys Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area Press To Ctrl a Move cursor between the screen area and the screen function keys area Return to the previous screen Esc Right Arrow on same screen row or Tab on any screen row Left Arrow on same screen row or Ctrl k Move cursor to the previous field Backspace Move cursor one position to the left or to the last character of the previous field Spacebar Delete Del Up Arrow or Ctrl u Down Arrow or Ctrl d Right Arrow or Ctrl f Left Arrow or Ctrl b Enter Return March 2000 Select the next valid value for the field Delete character that
114. a message was received from the SNMP Manager whose address was not on the lost of approved managers String Unauthorized access attempted Variable Binding devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps linkUp and linkDown 9626 A2 GB20 00 This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has a failure or recovery on one of its communication interfaces These traps are supported on the following interfaces m Network BRI and synchronous data ports Physical sublayer interfaces m COM and modem ports Network communication link interfaces m Frame relay logical link layer interfaces Table B 5 linkUp and linkDown Traps Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause linkDown A failure in one of the A failure in one of the communication interfaces communication interfaces has has occurred occurred linkUp One of the failed One of the failed communication communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational up and operational linkUp and linkDown variable bindings are in Table B 6 Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension MIB and either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB March 2000 B 9 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 1 of 3
115. access level to the TS Management Access Level to Level 2 TS Management Link or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 5 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support or Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about these configuration options 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 4 7 4 8 Security and Logins Controlling SNMP Access The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1 which provides limited security through the use of community names There are three methods for limiting SNMP access m Disabling SNMP access m Assigning SNMP community names and the access type m Assigning IP addresses of those NMSs that can access the unit Disabling SNMP Access When the SNMP access is disabled the FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages B Procedure To disable SNMP access 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication General SNMP Management 2 Disable the SNMP Management option 3 Save your change See Configuring SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for mo
116. ackup capability specifies the ISDN link of the DBM as the destination of the connection This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link Primary Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number Primary Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when the Primary Destination DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number 3 42 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 10 PVC Connection Options 3 of 3 Alternate Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 ISDN Link Name Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the alternate destination link the to end of a from to link that is used for
117. adyne Area alarms and they cannot be changed using NetScout software See Editing Alarms in Chapter 8 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Table B 12 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 1 of 2 Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID Interval Default Default Current Latency MIB pdn FrExt mib E 60 secs Must be Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest ymin conngurea OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs Must be Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg SEND contigured OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Frames Received MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Must be RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Sent MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Must be RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitSentFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D TX Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Must be EXGSEOIHg So Tag devFrExtDleiTxFrOutCIR I EOD OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 171 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 B 21 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 12 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 2 o
118. al number Invalid Call ID call ID m The incoming call was rejected because the Inbound Calling ID did not match the number in any of the enabled ISDN Link Profiles The rejected Inbound Calling ID appears at the end of the message if provided by the switch Link ISDN Link Name The selected ISDN backup link for which status will be displayed Link Operating Mode The status of the ISDN DBM Inactive m he ISDN line is disconnected or frame relay traffic and needs an active ISDN connection Disabled m The ISDN Link Profile is disabled Idle 1 m An ISDN link is not currently needed so there is no ISDN connection Active m The ISDN link is required for f Link Operating Mode is Disabled or Idle the Remote Call ID ISDN Channel and Negotiated Rate fields will not appear March 2000 5 27 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 12 DBM Interface Status 2 of 2 mad Status 00 0 What It Indicates It Indicates Status me overall status of the mne frame relay link Not Connected Invalid No calls are currently connected Link Profile on the selected link because the ISDN Link Profile is incomplete Not Connected No calls are currently connected on the selected link Connected m Atleast one call is actively connected and available for data transfer on the selected link Last Cause Value Various ITU cause Hefer to the Last Cause Value messages Messages for additional Previous Las
119. alarm condition persists until the event has been disarmed reset The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising threshold has not been crossed during an interval allowing the event to return to its original disarmed state March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Physical Interface Alarm Defaults This alarm only applies to the FrameSaver unit s network interface Table B 9 Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID Interval Default Default 900 secs 15 mins MIB pdn dds mib E Tag ddsUnavailableSecs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 2 1 1 9 1 Unavailable Seconds 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 B 17 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 1 of 2 Invalid Frames Short Frames Long Frames Rx Discards Tx Discards Rx Total Errors MIB Tag OID MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLo
120. an asynchronous terminal to the unit s m COM port See Configuring the Communication Port in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about communication COM port m Modem port See Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out and Configuring the Modem Port in Chapter 3 Configuration for additional information 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 4 3 Security and Logins Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port The modem port is already configured for dial in and asynchronous terminal access these are the default settings To limit dial in access via the modem port disable the Dial In Access configuration option Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Modem Port See Configuring the Modem Port in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about modem port options Controlling ISDN Access ISDN Call Security FrameSaver units with the built in DBM limit access through the following methods m ISDN call security m Disabling ISDN access The FrameSaver unit uses call screening to avoid accidental or intentional disruption of network traffic The answering DBM only accepts calls from valid calling number identifiers When the ISDN DBM interface is enabled the DBM takes advantage of ISDN services for network backup and Calling Number Identification Service CNIS to provide backup security ISDN assures the integrity of calling party identifiers The DBM uses the calling party ide
121. an be managed as an SNMP agent Disable Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent The FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps Community Name 1 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Public in ASCII text field Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 1 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 1 Name 1 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Write Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands Community Name 2 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear opecifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 2 maximum 255 charact
122. ance Report Performs trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCIs see page 9 9 for an example This is the first Network Health report to integrate the FrameSaver SLV s unique monitoring capabilities using the unit s SLV enhanced network statistics 9 8 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Paradyne Frame Saver SLV Plus At a Glance Heport WAN Element Largo RedBank dici 10 895 Bytes In bytes sac Latency Maximum Average meach ERE 25K 25K LEK HK rerum emp Bytes Qut bytes sec Burst Out Distributlonibytes sec bes 163k Te 120K Bn ya Ki T T T 1T 1 T1 DB BH Bum Aangel E Buri Range E Bursi Range 3 Frames in frames sec BH Burst Range 4 E Burst Range 5 pin an n in zu i rat A Network Frame Drops sec Frames Qut iframaes sac Frames Out Size Distribution Irames sec an zi teh 5 5 ri a a Aa aaa B OO bytos EE e ati byes RH 050 bytes DLCI Up Time 28 B 1000 bytes E 4000 bytes Link Up Time 55 10r Br ne SFR or ore mu Auto Hango Custom iuret TOPE 1958 Dd kor Ph From 10371968 3 10 PM To 102711998 05 39 PM m Trend Reports Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Repo
123. ancel test for the FrameSaver unit s interfaces Configuration Display and edit the configuration options Auto Configuration Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a selected application You can also automatically populate network and data port DLCI configuration options with numeric settings Control Control the asynchronous user interface for call directories device naming login administration and selecting software releases You can also initiate a power on reset of the FrameSaver unit See Appendix A Menu Hierarchy for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy which represents the organization of the FrameSaver unit s menus and screens March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation Screen Work Areas There are two user work areas m Screen area Where you input information into fields m Function keys area Where you perform specific screen functions Below is a sample configuration screen Model Number Menu Path Date and Time main config system slv 9626 Device Name Node A 05 26 1999 23 32 Device SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS Name SLV Sample Interval secs SLV Delivery Ratio DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Screen SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold Area SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold SLV Packet Size bytes SLV Synchronization Role Tributary Function Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Keys Are
124. arm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 3 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 41 I D Network Frames Dropped MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciDropOffFrlnCir In CIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 43 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn FrExt mib E E Tag devFrExtDIciRmtOffFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 45 I D Network Frames Lost MIB pdn FrExt mib E ROVE Tag devFrExtDIciRmtDropFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 55 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn FrExt mib E PROMIT Tag devFrExtDlciDropFrCirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 57 1 D Network Frames Dropped MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDrop CirToEir Above CIR Within EIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 59 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn FrExt mib E AROYE Ei Tag devFrExtDlciOfferedFrOverEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 61 1 D Network Frames Dropped MIB pdn FrExt mib E mpeg Tag devFrExtDIciRxFrNetDrop OverEir 1 8 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 63 1 D DLCI EIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 I D DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 I D Average Latency MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 6 1 D Maximum Latency MIB
125. ary command to place the data connection in binary transfer mode m When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS you can only get a uhbcfull dat file It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get this information see Transferring Collected Data m A data file uhbcfull dat or Imitrace syc cannot be put into a FrameSaver node m LMI packet capture data Imitrace syc is not readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is active FrameSaver SLV units provide an additional feature that allows new software to be downloaded in the background using the selected bandwidth and without interfering with normal operation Downloads can be performed quickly using the full line speed or at a slower rate over an extended period of time You initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver node in the same way as you would initiate an FTP to any other IP addressable device NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area into its Current Configuration area may take time Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit s currently active configuration March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance B Procedure To initiate an FTP session 1 Start the FTP client program on your host For example on a UNIX host type ftp followed by the FrameSaver unit s IP address 2 If a login and password are required see Creating a Login in Chapter
126. as declared the frame relay link Inactive Network problems 5 42 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 16 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 3 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay HDLC Errors Rx Total Errors The number of receiver errors on the interface The following are included in this count m Receive invalid frames short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors m Hx Total Discards m Receive errors non octet aligned frames frames with CRC errors and Rx Overruns Rx Total Discards The number of receiver discards on the interface The following are included in this count Resource errors Rx Overruns Frames received when the link was down Inactive and disconnected DLCls Inactive destination DLCls Unknown EDLCIs Rx Overruns The number of receiver overruns too many bits on the interface Rx Non Octet Frames The number of non octet frames received on the interface Rx CRC Errors The number of received CRC cycle redundancy check errors Tx Total Errors The total number of transmit errors on the interface including transmits discards and transmit overruns Tx Total Discards The total number of transmit discards on the interface including underrun flushes Tx Underruns The number of transmitter underruns too few bits on the interface 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 43 Operation and Maintenance DDS Line Performance Statistic
127. ate a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just created Configuration 5 Management and Communication Management PVC Minimally enter the following options Name for the management PVC Interface IP Address and Subnet Mask if different from the Node s Primary Link for this Management PVC the user data port Primary DLCI i e the data port DLCI 3 Save the configuration See Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options and Table 3 12 Management PVC Options for configuration information 3 20 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Using the system s standard Routing Information Protocol RIP feature routing information is passed to the router over the management PVC so the router can learn routes to FrameSaver SLV devices Node IP information should be set up see Configuring Node IP Information B Procedure 1 Configure the router to receive RIP For example if using a Cisco router configure config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 thenct1 z WR 2 Create a Standard DLCI for the user data port Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records 3 Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just configured Configuration Management and Communication Management PVCs 4 Set Primary Link RIP to Standard Out and Save the configuration Refer to Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options and Table 3 12 Management PVC Options for configuratio
128. ating Mode Select Software Release LMI Packet Capture Utility Disconnect Modem Reset Device Administer Logins Login ID Password Access Level System Information Device Name Current Release Alternate Release Switch amp Reset System Name Location Contact Date Time New 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 Select Software Release LMI Packet Capture Utility Capture Interface Packet Capture Start Stop Status Packets in Buffer Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log 99 16474b A 3 Menu Hierarchy A 4 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults This appendix contains the following information m MIB Support m Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps m System Group mib 2 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectlD system 2 m Interfaces Group mib 2 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table if Table NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps Trap warmStart Trap authenticationFailure Traps linkUp and linkDown Traps enterprise Specific Traps RMON Specific m RMON Alarm and Event Defaults Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area m Object ID Cross References Numeric Order 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 B 1 SNMP
129. ation 5 46 port options 3 66 setting up verifying setup and operation modem port 3 46 modifying a login 4 12 Monitor 511 test pattern 6 26 DTR Pattern 6 21 RTS monitoring DLCI history data FrameSaver unit LEDs and control leads using NetScout Manager Plus 8 18 Multilink Frame Relay Bundle Multiplexed DLCI 3 41 3 42 3 43 3 50 3 51 DLCI Type 3 38 PVCs 6 22 N N1 LMI Status Enquiry 3 25 3 36 N2 LMI Error Event 3 25 3 36 N3 LMI Clearing Event 3 25 3 36 Name 3 48 1 or 2 Access Access 3 52 Community 3 52 navigating the screens Net Link Port Use NetOnly 3 11 NetScout Manager Plus NMS support NMS support 9626 A2 GB20 00 Index Network cable and pin assignments Com Link Down configuring the interface 3 29 CSU or external Loopback DLCI records options 3 38 DSU or internal loopback Health Concord reports interface LEDS latency 1 3 reference time Network Health installation and setup Network Initiated DCLB NMS IP Address 3 56 8 57 4 10 IP Validation OpenLane management solution SNMP security options No Signal linkDown trap B 10 status 5 17 e 10 Node IP Address 3 45 Subnet Mask Node IP configuration option tables NS LED 5 6 NSP Number of Managers Trap Managers O odd parity OID object identification user history file cross ref
130. atus For the model with the built in ISDN BRI DBM these interface statuses appear when DBM Interface Status is selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status DBM Interface Status DBM Interface Status Screen Example main status dbm 9626 Device Name Node A 05 26 1999 23 32 DBM INTERFACE STATUS Line Status Invalid Call ID 8135551212 Link Colorado Link Operating Mode Active Call Status Connected Last Cause Value Call Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chnl 7 Previous Last Cause Value Call Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chn1 7 Remote Call ID 8135302000 ISDN Channel B1 Negotiated Rate Kbps Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh NextLink PrevLink Select the NextLink and PrevLink function keys to move forward or backward through the frame relay links that can be selected 5 26 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 12 DBM Interface Status 1 of 2 Field Status What It Indicates Line Status The overall status of the ISDN line Active error conditions exist m he ISDN line is active and no Disabled m The ISDN interface has been disabled Main Menu Configuration gt ISDN Physical an ISDN network alarm condition exists Invalid SPID m he switch has rejected one of the configured SPIDs ISDN BRI DBM only Invalid Local Number The phone number configured for a B channel is an invalid loc
131. automatic backup configuration configuration options domains and groups operating mode 3 22 software release Character Length 3 62 matching CIR statistics 5 37 CIR bps circuit multiplexed PVCs Clearing Event LMI 3 25 3 36 existing information clearing statistics 5 36 Clock Invert Transmit setting system Source Transmit CNIS COM port connector Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Committed Information Rate CIR Communication Port user interface options 3 62 Community Name 3 52 assigning Concord Network Health compatibility Concord reports Concord s Network Health Configuration Auto Active displaying and changing options menu menu branch option areas option tables 3 23 saving options tables upload download IN 2 March 2000 configuring added SLV units elements DBM interface to send traps DLCI records manually frame relay options modem port 3 66 NetScout Manager Plus network interface SLV options System options 3 23 the system Connectivity setting up service provider test Control keys lead descriptions Leads Ignore 3 63 menu branch viewing leads controlling async terminal access dial in access 4 4 FTP access ISDN access 4 4 SNMP access 4 8 Telnet access conversation elements copyright A CRC creating a login 4 11 new PVC connections management links user history fi
132. available when the FrameSaver unit has ISDN backup capability Typically DLCI Records only need to be configured when building Management PVCs between the NOC and the central site unit the unit automatically configures non management DLCI Records and PVC Connections Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options 1 of 3 DLCI Number Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record The parameter determines which DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface DLCI numbers range from 0 to 1023 However the numbers 0 15 and 1008 1023 are reserved Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range 16 1007 If the DLCI number is part of a connection this field is read only NOTES Ifa DLCI number is not entered the DLCI record is not created The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any active frame relay tests 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number inclusive DLCI Type Possible Settings Standard Multiplexed Default Setting For user data port DLCIs Standard For network and ISDN interface DLCIs Multiplexed opecifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed This field is read only when the selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is Standard
133. backup when the primary destination link or DLCI is out of service The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if ISDN Link Name has no DLCls defined the ISDN link name would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the alternate destination link ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link of the DBM interface as the alternate destination of the connection This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link Clear Alternate Clears the Alternate Destination Link and Alternate Destination DLCI settings and suppresses Alternate Destination EDLCI Alternate Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate destination Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI for a frame relay interface used for backup The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection Display Conditions This option does not appear when the Alternate Destination Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number Alternate Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no defau
134. ble Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected EDLC Is identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCIs Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI field 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number inclusive Primary Link RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard out Default Setting For multiplexed DLCIs Proprietary For nonmultiplexed DLCIs Standard out Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment None Does not use a routing protocol Proprietary Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing information between FrameSaver units A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of the link This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed DLCls see Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options Standard out The d
135. cable 14 feet 4 3 meters March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Index Numbers 511 test pattern 55 hexadecimal test pattern A aborting tests Access Dial In Level Port Name 3 52 Type 3 56 Access Level 4 10 4 11 assigning Port security Session 3 54 adding SLV units to network Alarm Fail 5 5 adding manually 8 11 conditions editing LED is lit RMON defaults B 16 using template ALM LED Alternate Dial Out Directory IP Address 3 68 software revision Subnet Mask Alternate Destination DLCI EDLCI Link Annex A and D LMI Protocol ARP inverse assigning community names and access levels At a Glance report authentificationFailure trap 9626 A2 GB20 00 Auto Backup Criteria 3 70 restricting 3 19 Auto Configuration Active 5 15 setting up 3 10 Auto On No Signal Autobaud availability LMI and PVC B back door access when locked out Back to Back Mode Active operation setting up 3 22 Backspace Backup Active 5 15 auto 3 70 changing automatic configuration dial 3 14 ISDN manually forcing over network interface verifying setup Bc 3 39 Be 3 39 Bearer channel BECN ISDN backup BKP LED blank field value branches menus bursting port March 2000 IN 1 Index C Call Directories Call Retry central clock 1 3 changing auto configuration
136. cable is not connected to the network or the Tx and Rx pairs are cross connected A signal is present and no out of frame conditions have been detected during the sampling interval Blinking ON and OFF Rate 1 Hz March 2000 At least one OOF has been detected during the sampling interval 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 3 Data Port Interface LED Operational The interchange circuits for the port Status are in the correct state to transmit and receive data OFF The port is idle Occurs if the port is disabled or if the port is configured to monitor DTR and or RTS and the lead s is not asserted Control Lead Descriptions 9626 A2 GB20 00 For the network interface see Table 5 2 Network Interface LEDs for descriptions of these leads The LED descriptions and control lead descriptions are the same For Port 1 see Table 5 4 These indicators show the current state of each control lead and what they indicate when they are highlighted that is in the On state Table 5 4 User Data Port Control Leads OK Operational Status The user data port is operational able to transmit and receive data TXD Transmit Data Data is being sent to the far end device RXD Receive Data Data is being received from the far end device DTR Data Terminal Ready Shows the current state of the DTR control lead This indicator should always be on CTS Clear to Send Shows the current state of the CTS co
137. can measure service performance against goals and agreements Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled About At a Glance Reports At a Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI and network performance indicators onto a single page Up to ten DLCIs can be included in an At a Glance Report Using the FrameSaver SLV report on page 9 9 you can compare a DLCI s volume with the network s performance over a specified period of time Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled In addition all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV device can accurately collect is provided so you can truly monitor the health of the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer s utilization on network efficiency 9 6 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 About Trend Reports Printed Reports Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices By specifying specific variables like bandwidth trend analysis can be performed and shown on Trend Reports Up to ten variables for a DLCI or ten DLCIs on one variable can be generated on a single trend report Information can be presented in a line graph pie chart bar chart or table format Any amount of time can be
138. cations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods m Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Be sure to register your warranty at www paradyne com warranty m Telephone Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Document Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document Please mail them to Technical Publications Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 or send e mail to userdoc paradyne com Include the number and title of this document in your correspondence Please include your name and phone number if you are willing to provide additional clarification Trademarks ACCULINK COMSPHERE FrameSaver and Hotwire are registered trademarks of Paradyne Corporation NextEDGE MVL OpenLane Performance Wizard and TruePut are trademarks of Paradyne Corporation All other products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners Patent Notification FrameSaver products are protected by U S Patents 5 550 700 and 5 654 966 Other patents are pending A March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Contents About This Guide m Purpose and Intended Audience 000 cece eee eens IX m Document Organization
139. ck An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back DDS i Network Interface FrameSaver Access Unit 98 15868 CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver device router or NMS to which it has a route Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are m To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver device in the network to verify that the path is operational Select Procedure 1 to Ping any far end FrameSaver device m To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver unit and the central site NMS During a remote site installation an IP Ping test is typically run from the remote site to Ping the NMS at the central site The remote FrameSaver device must have SNMP trap managers configured and one of those trap managers must be the central site NMS Select Procedure 2 to Ping the NMS at the central site m To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central site FrameSaver device The remote FrameSaver device must have configured the SNMP trap managers to be sent the Ping Select Procedure 2 to Ping the SNMP trap managers B Procedure 1 To Ping any
140. contact your service representative Enable the ISDN link profile if you want to make a call Check that the phone number is correct Contact your network provider if the problem persists Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network provider Change the ISDN Link Profile s Link Status to Auto Main Menu Configuration gt ISDN Link Profiles 9626 A2 GB20 00 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 3 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do For the network interface LMI Down frame relay link The Local Management Interface is down for the specified frame relay link f LMI was never up verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used f LMI was never up Verify that the proper time slots have been configured Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used m Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being transmitted If all of the above have been verified or the physical link is down contact your network provider For user data port m Check that the DTE cable is securely attached at both ends m Verify that Transmit Clock Source and Invert Transmit Clock options are properly configured m Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being received If no frames are being rece
141. cout Server Administrator Guide for additional information March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Verifying Domains and Groups B gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Configuration Manager File Password w Agent w AgentGroup w Switch FrameRelay 4 Domain y 8 Balay IP Address Properties File fw42prop 4 Shared w Custom 125 90 153 3 nd Samples Interval Logging 135 90 152 4 Edit Domain Groups SH LH SH LH Stat Host Conv Delete Test Learn Property Install ooooooooooo C QC O QC OO0 COO ooooooooooo ooocoococooooo KA AA KAKAI Ed GO DEI BE TI EG KE Lee A T OAE S A ET DOE UO Mp Pre Viu hd Sample DLCI Mame DTE DCE Grenada58 Variable Tupe Rising Falling DLCI 300 1536K 1536K Edit DLCI 301 1536K 1536K DLCI 302 1536K 1536K Download ILCI 303 1536K 1536K DLCI 304 1536K 1536K DLCI 305 1536K 1536K DLCI 306 1536K 1536K DLCI 307 1536K 1536K DLCI 308 1536K 1536K 2 Verify that only FrameSaver SLV supported domains appear listed in the Domain column FrameSaver SLV supported domains include ATALK IPX RMON DECNET NETB SNA IP NET VINES IPV6 OSI 3 Verify that S statistics collection appears for each domain liste
142. cout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Using the 2D or 3D Bar to view the user history data collected you can click on a particular bar and get an expanded view of the data NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History GrenadaS1 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 11 28 17 11 29 16 11 30 16 Wed Oct 21 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 B BH i BH Click to Zoom Out 8 Click anywhere on this window to return to the previous window view see Step 7 of this procedure Refer to Launching User History and Understanding Custom History Display in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Object ID Cross References Numeric Order in Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Default to identity OID information being shown Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Once the FrameSaver SLV agent has been added to NetScout Manager Plus select either the Traffic or Protocol radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCIs NOTE Only the Traffic and Protocol radio buttons on the application selection bar are supported for FrameSaver SLV agents The procedure below describes how to monitor an agent s traffic The procedure is the same for protocol monitoring but you may be prompted to select a Domain Group as well as
143. criptions Control Lead Descriptions m Device Messages m Status Information System and Test Status Messages which includes Self Test Results Messages Health and Status Messages Test Status Messages Network LMI Reported DLCls Status PVC Connection Status Network Interface Status DBM Interface Status Last Cause Value Messages m Performance Statistics Clearing Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI Performance Statistics Frame Relay Performance Statistics DDS Line Performance Statistics DBM Call Performance Statistics 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 1 Operation and Maintenance Modem Operation Manually Disconnecting the Modem Verifying Modem Operation ISDN BRI DBM Operation Manually Forcing Backup Disruptive Manually Placing a Call Nondisruptive Verifying ISDN Lines Verifying That Backup Can Take Place FTP File Transfers Upgrading System Software Upgrading ISDN BRI DBM Software Determining Whether a Download is Completed Changing Software Transferring Collected Data March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Displaying System Information 9626 A2 GB20 00 Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver unit This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement units and or making firmware upgrades Main M
144. cting a field from a menu Self Test Results messages Send 511 test pattern 6 25 Pattern 6 21 serial number NAM Service A Profile ID SPID 3 33 service level management reports verification configuring 3 26 statistics 5 37 verifier SLV service provider management control connectivity Session Access Level 3 54 4 5 4 7 ending starting Set DE setting Date amp Time system clock 3 8 date and time setting up auto configuration DBM ISDN link profiles local management 3 20 modem service provider connectivity SNMP trap managers so router can receive RIP March 2000 IN 9 Index SLA SLIP 3 65 3 68 SLM OpenLane SLV service level verifier 1 1 configuring 3 26 Delivery Ratio 3 26 DLCI Down on Timeout Packet Size performance statistics reports Sample Interval secs 3 26 Synchronization Role 3 27 Timeout Error Event Threshold 3 26 3 27 SNMP assigning community names access levels limiting access Management 3 52 4 8 NMS security options Number of Managers setting up Trap Managers Traps 3 57 downloading setting up DBM to send 3 19 standards supported software changing 5 53 ISDN BRI DBM download downloading 5 50 revision NAM 5 3 Source DLCI EDLCI Link Spacebar SPID Standard out RIP standards compliance for SNMP Traps starting a session a
145. ction None appears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end or if the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured Dropped SLV The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a Responses response from the far end device has not been received Total number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were dropped in transit Inbound Dropped Frames The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear m Above CIR m he number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit m Within CIR The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit Between CIR amp EIR The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit m Above EIR m he number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit March 2000 5 37 Operation and Maintenance 5 38 Table 5 14 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Sta
146. d 6 28 March 2000 V Contents 7 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices m OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices 7 1 m Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System lsuss 7 2 m Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support a 7 2 8 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices E Before Getting Started 644 e6s0vee dene wieseu ss 40604005 19 09000 60044 8 2 m Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 0 cc eee eee eee 8 3 Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus LES aura et ee arent AE RE Red RC ECCO eevee tae sacneee ves 8 4 Verifying Domains and Groups anaana rennara 8 5 Correcting Domains and Groups cece eee ee eens 8 6 Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template 00 00 eee 8 8 EN LI gare canindercs d qut Xo Sd NAKU AKEN PKO a pas 8 9 Adding SLV Alarms Manually 1xexescadessux asc ees ear ears 8 11 Creating History Files eee 8 13 Installing the User Defined History Files 8 15 m Monitoring a DLCs History Data isssesereki brciesee rk 44 4 eser 8 16 m Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus 8 18 m Statistical Windows Supported 0 a 8 20 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices m Installation and Setup of Network Health lusu 9 2 m Discovering FrameSaver Elements
147. d in the Group column H hosts appears for the IP domain only Dashes occupy all other positions under the Group column Zeros appear under the Samples and Interval SH and LH columns Dashes appear under all Logging columns Stat Host Conv 4 If all these requirements are met no further action is required Close the Configuration Manager window If all these requirements are not met a FrameSaver SLV supported domain needs to be added or if an unsupported domain needs to be deleted the Properties File must be edited 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 8 5 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Correcting Domains and Groups Properties need to be edited when not using the Paradyne provided file and when m An unsupported domain needs to be deleted A missing domain needs to be added m Groups Samples Interval and Logging are not configured as specified in Step 3 of Verifying Domains and Groups B Procedure 1 Select the the Property button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window The Property Editor window opens Property Editor Shared Tupe FrameRelau Samples Interval Loggina Domain Groups LH SH LH Stat Host Cony ml mc oO D D D c c e a a D O Q a a g 9 a D D o Trap Variable Rising Falling EHI Delete 2 To delete an unsupported domain click on the domain from the Domains list then select the Delete button
148. d network DLCI and a standard data port DLCI will be configured and connected and a Management PVC will be embedded in the network DLCI When LMI is active on the network interface and PVC status information with provisioned DLCI numbers is next received from the network the unit automatically saves the settings to the Current Configuration area Configuration options set by the selected discovery mode can be manually modified refined or deleted at any time using the Configuration menus No previously discovered and configured DLCls or cross connections will be removed unless authorized or Automatic Circuit Removal is enabled see Automatically Hemoving a Circuit Additional discovered DLCls will be configured according to the current Frame Relay Discovery Mode setting Selecting or changing the setting will not affect IP Addresses or Subnet Masks NOTE When auto configuration creates a multiplexed DLCI but a standard DLCI is needed change the DLCI to standard from the network DLCI Records screen Configuration Network DLCI Records March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is changed and saved the Saving will cause Auto Configuration to update and Restart Are you sure prompt appears No is the default for this prompt If Yes y is entered the Delete A11 DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt appears No is the default for this prompt f Yes is entered all multiplexed DLCIs and PVC
149. d of time that the condition has existed An Out of Service condition has been detected on the DDS network interface followed by the period of time that the condition has existed An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI the DLCI is not suitable for user data When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted as long as the condition exists frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port Check for a cross pair condition Verify that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Contact your network provider Verify that the DDS Line Rate Kbps option is configured correctly Contact your network provider Check for a cross pair condition Verify that the network cable is securely attached at both ends m Contact your network provider Contact your network provider if the problem persists If a DBM is present and Auto Backup is enabled backup is initiated automatically ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface hhh mm ss indicates the number of hours maximum 255 minutes maximum 59 and seconds maximum 59 When 255
150. d the condition is expected to continue A call resume has been issued but no calls have been suspended No circuit channel is currently available to handle the call Network through which call has been routed does not serve the destination area or device No causes have been generated March 2000 What To Do Check your ISDN link profile and correct the number Contact your service representative Contact your service representative Contact your service representative Retry the call Contact your service representative Contact your service representative No action is needed Wait and try again Contact your service representative No action is needed Non selected User 26 User has not been awarded No action is needed Clearing the incoming call 5 31 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 13 Last Cause Value Messages 4 of 6 Message No Route to Specify Transit Network Normal Call Clearing Normal Unspecified No User Responding Number Changed Only Restricted Bearer Capability Available Outgoing Calls Barred Pre empted Protocol Error Unspecified 5 32 16 70 52 45 111 What It Indicates The device sending or receiving this cause does not recognize the transit network that the call is being has been routed through Call is being cleared because either the caller or receiver has requested that it be cleared Remote u
151. data directory If retrieving Then SLV statistics Perform a get of the uhbcfull dat file File Transfer Complete Transfer was successful m File Transfer Failed Transfer was not successful Try again or end the session LMI packet capture data Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu Control gt LMI Packet Capture Utility LMI packet capture data is not available readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active Perform a get of the Imitrace syc file One of the following will display for the file File Transfer Complete File Transfer Failed Permission Denied The LMI Packet Capture Utility was not readable Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility and try again 3 Close the FTP session SLV statistics and or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting 5 54 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting 9626 A2 GB20 00 This chapter includes the following Problem Indicators Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Troubleshooting Management Link Feature LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface Alarms Troubleshooting Tables Device Problems Frame Relay PVC Problems ISDN DBM Problems Tests Available Test Timeout Feature
152. dex rating indicates problems It is a good idea to run these reports daily so a norm can be established The same DLCls should appear Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems Problems to look for include a normally high volume DLCI is dropped from the list a new DLCI appears on the list check Element Summaries a DLCI has a high Health Index rating but low volume significant differences between a DLCI s average and peak Health Index rating March 2000 9 7 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Elements Summary Report Compares DLCI traffic with volume and the baseline bandwidth utilization and errors Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison to identify DLCIs with above or below average volume so they can be investigated when there are any significant changes m Supplemental Report Shows DLCI availability and latency The information shown in this report is also on other Health reports However these charts show more than ten DLCls at a time so you have a broader view of the service provided by the network m Service Level Reports Provide summary information for a group list for a longer reporting period than other reports Executive Service Level Report Provides service level performance for an enterprise on a single page Use this report to assess whether IT service levels are meeting availability and service goals IT Manager Service Level Report
153. e 3 2 Service Level Verification Options Table 3 3 General System Options Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options Table 3 6 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options Table 3 7 ISDN Link Profile Options Table 3 8 Interface Frame Relay Options Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options Table 3 10 PVC Connection Options Table 3 11 Node IP Options Table 3 12 Management PVC Options Table 3 13 General SNMP Management Options Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options Table 3 15 SNMP NMS Security Options Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options Table 3 17 Communication Port Options Table 3 18 Modem Port Options Table 3 19 Auto Backup Criteria Options Configuring the Overall System The System menu includes the following 9626 A2 GB20 00 Frame Relay and LMI Service Level Verification General March 2000 3 23 Configuration Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the Frame Relay and LMI options for the entire system see Table 3 1 Main Menu gt Configuration gt System Frame Relay and LMI See Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface to set an interface s frame relay options Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 1 of 2 LMI Behavior Possible Settings Independent Port 1 Follows Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Follows Port 1 Port 1 Codependent with Net1 FR1 Default S
154. e LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enqui
155. e Relay Logical Layer Frame relay logical link on the DDS network interface Frame Relay 1 Network ifDescr ifEntry 2 For the DTE side 1 RMON IN OUT Network DDS of FR DTE DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side RMON IN OUT Network DDS of FR SERVICE DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay 3 Synchronous Data Sync Data Port 1 Port 1 ISDN BRI Frame relay logical DBM link on BRI if applicable March 2000 For the user side RMON IN OUT Synchronous Data Port of FR DTE Slot 1 Port 1 DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh 3 For the network side RMON IN OUT Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 1 DDS FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the user side 16 RMON IN OUT ISDN BHI DBM of FR DTE Profile Link Name DDS FR NAM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side RMON IN OUT ISDN BHI DBM of FR SERVICE Profile Link Name DDS FR NAM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh B 5 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 6 Table B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information 2 of 2 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex RMON Logical Layer RMON Frame Relay Logical Interfaces RMON Virtual Interfaces RMON Virtual Logical Interfaces These values are OUT RMON IN calculated fName of the interface m Forthe DTE iflnd
156. e capability to view system information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Level 2 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Inactivity Timeout ET C HN Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of keyboard inactivity Enable Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires Disable Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is disconnected Display Conditions This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled 1 60 Up to an hour can be set FTP Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP file transfer protocol client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session This option must be enabled when downloading files Enable Allo
157. e captured packet and the number of bytes in the packet The LMI Type identified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured packet and the DLCI number for the packet m The type of information contained in the captured packet either Sequence Number Exchange or Full Status Report m The send and receive rcv sequence numbers from the captured packet 0 255 m On the Packets Received side of the screen PVC status for up to ten DLCIs can be shown It shows the DLCI number its active bit status and if Standard LMI is running the DLCI s CIR value 6 6 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Alarms 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and the frame relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Main Menu Status System and Test Status Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 1 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Cross Pair Detection A cross pair condition has Reverse the Rx and Tx pair at been detected on the DDS the punchdown block or other network interface Rx and termination point Tx pair are reversed CTS down to Port 1 Device Check DTR and RTS from Port 1 The CTS control lead on the device s interface is off DLCI nnnn Down frame relay link 1 2 The
158. e lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information If Login Required is set to Enable the effective access level is 2 for User ID access levels of 1 or 2 User IDs set to access Level 3 have only Level 3 access Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can only display and monitor status and configuration screens If Login Required is set to Enable the effective access level is 3 for all user IDs Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects the user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect the user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Determines the amount of lapsed time before disconnecting a user session in minutes Display Conditions This option only appears when m Port Use is set to Terminal m Inactivity Timeout is set to Enable 1 60 Sets the number of minutes allowed before the modem disconnects 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 67
159. e s Disable Does not disconnect the call and holds the line until it is disconnected manually or by the remote modem This allows the NMS to poll the FrameSaver unit for more information after receiving an SNMP trap Call Retry Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether an incomplete call busy no answer etc is retried when an SNMP trap message is sent to the modem port If an Alternate Dial Out Directory is specified the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed then the alternate directory s telephone number is called see the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Enable Attempts to retry the call up to one time per SNMP trap message with a delay between the retry The delay is specified by the Dial Out Delay Time Min configuration option Disable Does not retry an incomplete call Dial Out Delay Tlme Min Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 5 Specifies the amount of time between call retries when an SNMP trap message is sent the wait between call attempts see Call Retry 1 10 Sets the number of minutes for the delay between call retry attempts March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 5 of 5 Alternate Dial Out Directory Possible Settings None 1 5 Default Setting None Specifies whether an incomplete call busy or no answer etc
160. ed DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set 1 Only appears for the network interface Frame Relay Delivery Ratio delivered frames offered frames Data Delivery Ratio delivered octets offered octets 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 39 Operation and Maintenance 5 40 Table 5 15 DLCI Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates m With BECN Set m The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications BEONS are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Total Rx Frames Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes received Rx Octets for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link m Within CIR m The number of frames and octets received on the selected m Between CIR amp EIR a m Above EIR a m With DE Set a m With BECN Set m m With FECN Set m DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard el
161. ed to Inactive and New to Active 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 21 Operation and Maintenance PVC Connection Status PVC connection statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status PVC Connection Status The PVC Connection Status screen for FrameSaver 9626 units show an alternate destination for backup as well as a primary destination PVC Connection Status Screen Example main status connections 9626 Device Name Node A 05 26 1999 23 32 Page 1 of 2 PVC CONNECTION STATUS Source Primary Destination Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Link DLCI EDLCI Status Link DLCI EDLCI Status Port 1 201 Net1 FR1 300 Port 1 202 Net1 FR1 1001 Port 1 100 Net1 FR1 1001 Port 1 204 Net1 FR1 1001 Mgmt PVC Mgm205 Net1 FR1 1001 Port 1 206 Net1 FR1 1001 Port 1 207 Net1 FR1 1001 Port 1 208 Net1 FR1 500 Port 1 209 Net1 FR1 502 Net1 FR1 Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active HQ Site 400 Inactive Inactive HQ Site 302 0 Active Inactive HQ Site 304 0 Active 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh For models without a built in BRI DBM an alternate DLCI can be used to backup user data For models with the built in BRI DBM for ISDN backup the DBM provides backup support through the unit s ISDN DBM interface This is what is shown in the screen example above It shows a remote site unit backing up to the central site HQ Site For additional informatio
162. een the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors Disable Does not phase invert the TXC clock Monitor DTR Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable opecifies whether the state of the DTE Ready DTR circuit on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When the DTR off condition is detected an alarm is generated LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchange circuit CD ITU 108 1 2 DTR is monitored to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE Disable DTR is not monitored DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 31 Configuration Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 2 of 2 Monitor RTS Control Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Dineen o O O Specifies whether the state of the Request To Send RTS circuits on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When the RTS off condition is detected CTS is deasserted LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchange circuit CA ITU 105 RTS is monitored to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE Disable RTS is not monitored
163. elnet the User Interface Already In Use screen is redisplayed The type of connection Telnet Connection Direct COM Port Connection or Direct Modem Port Connection for each current user is identified along with the user s login ID B gt Procedure To end the session 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function keys area of the screen 2 Type e Exit and press Enter For a COM port connected terminal the session is ended For a modem port connected terminal the session is ended and the modem is disconnected Fora Telnet connection the session is closed and if no other Telnet or FTP session is occurring over the connection the modem is disconnected If ending a session from the Configuration branch see Saving Configuration Options in Chapter 3 Configuration 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 2 3 User Interface and Basic Operation Main Menu 2 4 Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit s tasks begins at the Main Menu which has five menus or branches The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears when security has been set up main Access Level 1 9626 Device Name Node A 05 26 1999 23 32 Slot 1 Type T1 FR NAM MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Ctrl a to access these functions Select To Status View diagnostic tests interfaces PVC connections and statistics You can also display LEDs and FrameSaver unit identity information Test Select and c
164. em port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not require a login 3 66 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 18 Modem Port Options 2 of 4 Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Port Access Level Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the modem port NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only Level 3 access will be permitted for the modem port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing If Login Required is set to Enable the effective access level is determined by the user s access level Otherwise the access level is 1 CAUTION Before changing the modem port s access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that either Telnet Session Access Level or the communications port s Port Access Level is set to Level 1 and at least one Login ID are set to Level 1 Otherwise access will b
165. en the management PVC is providing connectivity to an external IP network through frame relay that requires a specific subnet mask for the interface Node Subnet Mask Uses the Interface IP Subnet contained in the Node Subnet Mask configuration option see Table 3 11 Node IP Options Calculate Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Cannot be displayed or edited Special 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Allows you to edit display the subnet mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface A text field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this units management PVC Set DE Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether frames packets sent on a management PVC have the Discard Eligible DE bit set This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard first during periods of network congestion This allows management traffic to be viewed as lower priority than customer data Enable Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC Disable Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC This is the recommended setting particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service Primary Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Port 1 ISDN Link Name Clear Defaul
166. ency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling interval and the average is computed using packets with the configured SLV Packet Size bytes Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options over the previous 15 minute period If SLV Packet Size is changed a new average is not available until a new sample has been received Unknown appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 minutes has not been successful Max RdTrip Latency Same as average Avg RdTrip Latency but storing the maximum value of latency over the previous 15 minute interval Unknown appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 minutes has not been successful March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance The statistics collected by the unit depend upon the device at the far end of the connection If the far end device is a FrameSaver SLV unit frame relay latency and FDR DDR performance statistics are collected If the far end device is a non FrameSaver device or a FrameSaver 9120 or 9620 only frame relay statistics are collected DLCI Performance Statistics These statistics appear when DLCI is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu Status Performance Statistics DLCI Table 5 15 DLCI Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic 0 What It I
167. ent protocol The unit s frame relay capability also supports nband management channels over the frame relay network using dedicated PVCs Unique nondisruptive diagnostics CIR monitoring on a PVC basis Multiple PVCs on an interface Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single network PVC Auto Configuration Provides the following automatic configuration features Frame Relay Discovery For automatic discovery of network DLCls and configuration of a user data port DLCI the PVC connection and a management PVC which is multiplexed with user data DLCls LMI Protocol Discovery For automatic configuration of the protocol being used by the network Backup Configuration For units with the built in ISDN DBM feature automatic configuration of an alternate route and DLCI for automatically created PVCs When the automatic backup feature is enabled backup and restoration occur automatically DLCI Deletion For automatic removal of configuration of unused DLCls from the unit s configuration and statistical databases CIR Determination For automatic recalculation of the committed rate measurement interval Tc and excess burst size Be when a DLCI s CIR changes March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 9626 A2 GB20 00 About the FrameSaver SLV 9626 Excess burst size Be and committed burst size Bc are
168. enu Status Identity View this field To find the System Name Domain name for this SNMP managed node up to 255 ASCII characters System Contact Contact person for this SNMP managed node System Location Physical location for this SNMP managed node NAM Type Type of unit installed referred to as a network access module or NAM i e DDS FR NAM This card type is supported by the SNMP SysDescr Object Serial Number Unit s 7 character serial number Current Software Revision Software version currently being used by the unit Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit but has not yet been implemented Format is the same as for the Current Software Revision m In Progress indicates that the flash memory is currently being downloaded m Invalidindicates that no download has occurred or the download was not successful Hardware Revision Unit s hardware version Format nnnn nnx consists of a 4 digit number followed by two digits and one alphabetic character March 2000 5 3 Operation and Maintenance Viewing LEDs and Control Leads The FrameSaver 9626 unit s faceplate includes LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the unit and its interfaces This faceplate is the same whether or not the unit has a DBM 9626 o IS N R A R on S SES PA FrameSa
169. eported DLCls screen No receipt or transmission of data DLCI is inactive on the Verify that the DLCI s is frame relay network active on the LMI Reported DLCls screen If the DLCI s is not active contact the service provider Verify the LMI Reported DLCI field on the Interface Status screen DTE is configured incorrectly Check the DTE s configuration LMI is not configured properly for the DTE or network Configure LMI characteristics to match those of the DTE or network LMI link is inactive Verify that the LMI link is active on the network the Status Msg Received counter on the Network Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen increments Losing Data Frame relay network is Run PVC Loopback and Pattern experiencing problems tests to isolate the problem then contact the service provider Out of Sync If Monitor Pattern was Verify that the unit at the selected it means the test other end is configured to pattern generator and Send Pattern receiver have not yet Correct unit configurations synchronized Correct the CIR setting so both units are configured the same CIR settings for the units at each end are mismatched If the message persists it EE means that 5 packets out of o the dis S A 25 are missing or are out of Dreier ea sequence Contact the service provider March 2000 6 13 Troubleshooting ISDN DBM Problems Table 6 4 ISDN
170. er LAN adapter terminal server etc is connected Communicating with an unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops which will last 16 iterations times the retry count None No default network destination is specified Unrouteable data will be discarded This is the recommended setting Modem Specifies that the default destination is connected to the modem port Only appears when the modem port Use option is set to Net Link COM Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM port Only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 17 Communication Port Options PVCname Specifies a name for the management PVC Only appears when a management PVC name is defined for the node For example when the network is connected to a remote device located in the London office London can be specified as the PVC name which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located in London London would appear as one of the available selections TS Management Link Available Settings None PVCname Default Setting None Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service providers If the option is changed from the management PVC name to None the Delete the Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Record prompt appears If you select No The link designation is removed and the option is set to None m Yes The link designation is rem
171. ered about your network for statistical and trend analysis Conversation elements Provide RMON and similar data for information gathered about network traffic between nodes B Procedure To find SLV device elements in your network 1 Select the LAN WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found Network Health treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type 2 Enter the IP Addresses of the SLV units to be located and the Community String Community Name in the FrameSaver unit The Community String is case sensitive 3 Select the Discover button The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens showing the results of the discovery process A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of existing elements updated when the discovery process is complete Depending upon the number of units entered and the size of your network it could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all elements in the network See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information and to learn how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to the database 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 9 3 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Configuring the Discovered Elements Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for the first time For a FrameSaver SLV unit the speed set would be the uni
172. erence numeric order B 24 B 28 OK LED OOF alarm 5 5 LED OOS alarm 5 5 LED 5 6 March 2000 IN 7 Index OpenLane SLM support OpenLane 5 operating changing mode for demos operation organization of this document Out of Frame status 5 17 6 10 Out of Service linkDown trap B 10 status 5 17 6 10 Out of Sync 6 26 message Outbound Management Priority Outbound Phone Number 3 34 P packet capture uploading data utility 6 5 packets 3 49 Parity 3 62 Password patents A pattern send monitor interior performance statistics Performance Wizard copying directory 8 2 Phone Number 3 33 physical data port options ISDN options 3 33 tests 6 23 pin assignments COM port to LAN cables DDS network cable ISDN DBM connector modem connector Port 1 V 35 connector Ping test 6 27 placing a call manually IN 8 Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks 3 32 Access Level 3 63 B 67 4 3 bursting communication options 3 62 control leads modem options 3 66 Use 3 62 5 66 PPP 3 65 3 68 Primary Destination DLCI EDLCI Link Primary Frame Relay Link Primary Link RIP printed reports problem indicators product related documents Profile ID SPID 3 33 profiles entering 3 34 Proprietary RIP 3 50 B 65 3 69 Protocol address resolution Link 3 65 9 68 LMI Point to Point PPP
173. erformance Statistics 5 37 DLCI Performance Statistics 21044205 deca da EO ded do ei d 5 39 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 5 41 DDS Line Performance Statistics 0 0 00 cc cece eee 5 44 DBM Call Performance Statistics 0 0 00 cece ene 5 45 NO ET asc a PMA news rsegeaskesnsea pes 5 46 Manually Disconnecting the Modem Lus 5 46 Verifying Modem Operation 0000 cece eee eee eens 5 46 m ISDN BRI DBM Operation 00 00 c eee eee eee eee 5 47 Manually Forcing Backup Disruptive 000 eee e eee ee 5 47 Manually Placing a Call Nondisruptive 5 48 Veniying ISDN LINGS asus eden ded cioiedeto d doli Et sane ae odo wes 5 48 Verifying That Backup Can Take Place usus 5 49 BH FUP File Transfers aucccenscesacusuesusre AZ RARUS Shae ee gae Be SEs 5 50 Upgrading System Software 0 ccc eee eee 5 52 Upgrading ISDN BRI DBM Software 0005 5 52 Determining Whether a Download Is Completed 5 53 Changing Software 2424s4s0640040040d0ceebasaserddkadansensde 5 53 Transferring Collected Data 0 aaa 5 54 iv March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 6 Contents Troubleshooting 9626 A2 GB20 00 Fabian elec AA 49mEsSRS d QE dE Eie ede e E ende 6 2 Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication 6 3 Resetting the Unit from the Control Me
174. ers Clear Clears Community Name 2 Name 2 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Telnet and FTP options control whether a Telnet or FTP File Transport Protocol session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security applicable to the session Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time see Table 3 14 Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Session When a TS Management Link has been set up and activated the following options have no effect upon the PVC m Telnet Login Required m Session Access Level m FIPLogin Required Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options 1 of 3 Telnet Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet client on an interconnected IP network Enable Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet clien
175. es the latching loopback test if it is active NOTE Because the latching loopback code is a control sequence as opposed to a bipolar violation sequence user data may activate the loopback Disable this option to stop an unintentional latching loopback Network Initiated DCLB Possible Settings Disable V 54 amp ANSI Default Setting V 54 amp ANSI Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback DCLB V 54 loop 2 to be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB actuate or DCLB release sequence either V 54 or FT1 ANSI compliant from the network or a far end FrameSaver device When enabled and a DCLB activate sequence is received the unit initiates a DCLB on the network interface When a DCLB release sequence is received the DCLB is stopped Disable DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences are ignored V 54 amp ANSI DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either V 54 or ANSI T1 403 Annex B standard will be recognized and will control initiation and termination of a DCLB for this frame relay link The actuate and release sequences do not need to match for example a DCLB started with a V 54 actuate sequence can be stopped with an FT1 release sequence 3 30 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring the User Data Port Select Physical from the Data Ports menu to configure the physical characteristics for the user data port see Table 3 5 Main Menu Configuration Dat
176. est Start is highlighted 5 Highlight the Start command for the test you want to start and press Enter Stop now appears and is highlighted and the status of the test changes to Active 6 Press Enter to stop the test Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive 7 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 6 17 Troubleshooting Aborting All Tests Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on all interfaces with exception to DTE initiated loopbacks To abort individual tests that are active see Starting and Stopping a Test B Procedure To abort all tests on all interfaces 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 2 Select Abort All Tests and press Enter Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been stopped NOTE Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE initiated loopbacks 6 18 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 PVC Tests 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface m When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices they are nondisruptive to data so user data can continue to be sent during a test m f the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device PVC tests are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data Also the Connectivity test would not appear
177. etting Independent Configures the device to allow the state of the LMI to be passed from one interface to another determining how the unit will handle a change in the LMI state Sometimes referred to as LMI pass through NOTE LMI Behavior cannot be changed while Auto Backup is enabled see Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup A warning message appears at the bottom of the screen if Auto Backup is enabled First disable Auto Backup and then change LMI Behavior Independent Handles the LMI state of each interface separately so that the LMI state of one interface has no effect on the LMI state of another interface Provides LMI Spoofing This is the recommended setting when backup is configured and for Network Service Providers NSPs Net1 FR1 Follows Port 1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads When LMI on Port 1 comes back up the network interface is reenabled The LMI state on the network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Port 1 That is the network interface s LMI follows Port 1 s LMI Used at central sites this setting is useful when the remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure Not recommended for NSPs Port 1 Follows Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network
178. etwork service providers with the capability to view unit information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 47 Configuration Configuring Management PV Cs 3 48 Select Management PVOs to define inband management links by adding or changing Management PVOs see Table 3 12 First DLCI records must have been configured for the interface where the Management PVC will reside See Manually Configuring DLCI Records for additional information Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Management PVCs Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs m When you select New the configuration option field is blank m When you select Modify the values displayed for all fields are based on the PVC ID number that you specified These options do not apply when the Management PVC is designated as a TS Management Link see Configuring Node IP Options for additional information From this screen you can go directly to the PVC Connections screen by selecting the PVCConn function key for easy movement between screens Select the Delete function key a Management PVC ID and respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt for quick removal of unused DLCI
179. evice will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information only about other FrameSaver SLV units in the network This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCls NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the FrameSaver unit for the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ctl z WR See Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP 3 50 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 12 Management PVC Options 4 of 4 Alternate Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 SDN Link Name Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC as the alternate link The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLC with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Display Conditions This option does not appear unless ISDN backup is available Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the frame relay link ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link of the DBM to be used in the connection This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link on an installed DBM Clear Clears the link and the DLCI field and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was multiplexed Alternate EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default
180. ex 1 2417 OUT RMON OUT Forthe DCE DTE fName of the interface calculated value 1 These values are calculated based on the probe s internal circuit index circuit index 65 These values are IN VIRTUAL PVC calculated interface number For the DTE DLCI number DTE virtual interface iflndex 65 2 1513 OUT VIRTUAL PVC interface number For the DCE DLCI number DCE DTE calculated value 1 March 2000 17 48 65 512 513 1023 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps This section describes the FrameSaver unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the meaning of the trap Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing SifString have the following format DLCI dlciNumber circuitld of ifName frame relay link linkName SdlciNumber is the DLCI number DLCI dlciNumber Scircuitld only appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap Gcircuitld is the name given to the circuit It can be an empty string or a 1 64 byte string within quotes e g Chicago to New York and only appears when a DLCI with circuitID is associated with the trap linkName is the name given to the link Frame relay SlinkName only appears when a frame relay link has been na
181. f 1 B 15 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults RMON Alarm and Event Defaults B 16 The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap or a log event is sent Event Defaults Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit there is no need to define multiple events for each alarm type so only the following two events need to be generated eventIndex eventDescription eventType eventCommunity 1 Default SLV Rising Event log and trap 4 0 2 Default SLV Falling Event log and trap 4 EI The alarm default tables starting on the next page show how each RMON default alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit shows the alarm and event types the interval used when generating alarms and thresholds m Physical Interface Alarm Defaults m Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults m DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area m DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps for information about how traps work and Traps RMON Specific for traps specific to remote monitoring Rising Event Operation If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table e g frames dropped by the network the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the end of the interval Only one alarm per event per interval is generated The
182. f 2 Rising Falling Event Threshold Threshold Item MIB Tag OID Interval Type Default Default Tx CIR Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs None Must be RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 in the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number Table B 13 Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID Interval Default Default Rx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D 70 of link capability 65 of link capability 60 secs 1 min Tx DLCI Link MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization RFC 2115 1 min capability capability Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 in the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 22 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and
183. f the nam ocd file in the system memory directory using the put command NOTE Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC or through the COM port if Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 17 Communication Port Options B Procedure To download software 1 2 3 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading Type bin to enter binary transfer mode Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment Type cd system to change to the system directory Perform a put of Rxxxxxx ocd xxxxxx being the software release number to the nam ocd file to start the upgrade If the message displayed is Then nam ocd File Transfer Complete The download was successful The file is loaded into system memory nam ocd File Transfer Failed The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit Invalid file A different Rxxxxxx ocd file will need to be downloaded Repeat the step or end the FTP session NOTE During the download a series of hash marks appear When the hash marks stop appearing there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the nam ocd File Transfer Complete message appears Please be patient Do not exit from FTP at this time See Changing Software to activate the newly downloaded software Upgrading ISDN BRI DBM Software The FrameSaver 9626 unit s BRI DBM program code
184. fault Setting 1 Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port 1 Provides one stop bit 2 Provides two stop bits Ignore Control Leads Possible Settings Disable DTR Default Setting Disable Specifies whether DTR is used Disable Treats control leads as standard operation DTR Ignores DTR This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not requires a login Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 opecifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port If a login is required for the port the effective access level is determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access will be permitted for the port Display Cond
185. first ISDN Link Profile have been configured manually it is recommended that specific discovered DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs be deleted manually via the Configuration menus Otherwise the manual configurations will be deleted along with the automatically configured ones To specify when automatic backup is allowed or can occur see Setting the Criteria for Automatic Backup 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 17 Configuration Modifying ISDN Link Profiles B Procedure 1 Select Link Profiles then Modify Main Menu Configuration ISDN Link Profiles 2 Add a name and phone number to the ISDN Link Profile s created by Automatic Backup Configuration Name for the destination entered e g Tampa The default setting is HQ Site for the first ISDN Link Profile Link Status set to Auto Phone numbers entered Originating System Answering System Outbound phone number Inbound Calling ID1 and ID2 These Valid characters can include are the phone numbers of units that Numbers 0 9 calls will be accepted from m Special characters and Valid characters can include m Spaces m Numbers 0 9 m Parentheses NOTE Remember to include local dial out numbers i e 9 then the number Maximum Link Rate Kbps set to the appropriate speed if necessary 3 Save the configuration See Table 3 7 ISDN Link Profile Options for configuration information 3 18 March 2000 9626
186. g Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 2 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Internal Modem Failed The unit s internal modem ISDN Link Profile Disabled ISDN Link Name ISDN Link Profile Invalid ISDN Link Name ISDN Network Failed Active Idle Link Down Administratively frame relay link Link Profile Disabled ISDN Link Name failed to pass the self test An ISDN backup call could not be made because the ISDN link profile specified Link Name is disabled Main Menu gt Configuration ISDN gt Link Profiles An ISDN backup call could not be made because the ISDN link profile specified ISDN Link Name is invalid An ISDN network failure was detected when a backup call was in progress or the DBM was in ldle mode The specified frame relay link has been disabled by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI Protocol on another link is in a failed state This is not an alarm condition so System Operational appears as well An ISDN backup call could not be made because the specified link profile was disabled frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface 6 8 March 2000 Reset the FrameSaver unit Main Menu Control gt Reset Device If the modem fails again
187. go directly to the Management PVC screen by selecting the MgmtPVCs function key for easy movement between screens Quick removal of unused DLCls and ISDN Link Profiles except for HQ Site if the model has ISDN backup capability included in an existing PVC Connection is also available when the Delete function key is selected and you respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt Table 3 10 PVC Connection Options 1 of 3 Source Link Possible Settings Port 1 ISDN Link Name Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection the from end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if Port 1 has no DLCIs defined Port 1 would not appear as a valid setting Port 1 Specifies the user data port as the source link ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link of the DBM as the source link This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface or network data port as the source link Clear All Clears all Link and DLCI settings and suppresses EDLCIS Source DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default S
188. gure the physical characteristics for the network interface see Table 3 4 Main Menu Configuration Network Physical Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 1 of 2 Transmit Timing Possible Settings Internal Receive Default Setting Receive Specifies the unit s timing source based upon how the unit will be used When the unit is connected to a DDS network for standard operation timing is provided by the network In a LADS or LDM application local area data set limited distance modem where local and remote FrameSaver units are directly connected one of the units provides timing for both units Internal Timing for the unit and its attached LADS partner is derived from the unit s internal clock Use this setting when the unit will be used as a LADS primary timing unit where the FrameSaver unit establishes overall timing for the two interconnected units Receive Timing for the unit is derived from the network Received signal Use this setting for standard DDS operation or when the unit will be used as a LADS secondary timing unit See DDS Line Rate Kbps 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 29 Configuration Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 2 of 2 DDS Line Rate Kbps Possible Settings Auto On No Signal Initialize From Network 56 64CC Default Setting Auto On No Signal Configures the network interface s line speed to match the Digital Data Service s DDS s line speed Thi
189. gured Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication Node IP Default IP Destination Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC Multiplexing is used as when using the Auto Configuration feature 4 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu Test gt IP Ping 5 Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS then select Start 6 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress isdisplayed in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing will be required See Configuring General System Options in Chapter 3 Configuration to configure the unit to stop the test automatically The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1 2 second during execution of the test When the test is stopped the LEDs are restored to their normal condition Main Menu Test gt Lamp Test If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set the Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires See Test Timeout Feature for additional information March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices This chapter includes m OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Device
190. guring SNMP NMS Security Options Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Configuring the Communication Port Configuring the Modem Port Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Basic Configuration Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates Use the FrameSaver unit s Configuration Edit Display menu to display or change configuration option settings The Configuration Edit Display menu of the FrameSaver 9626 is shown below This example is for the model with the built in DBM If the unit does not have a DBM ISDN and Auto Backup Criteria do not appear on the menu Configuration Menu main config 9626 Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 CONFIGURATION EDIT DISPLAY System Network Data Ports ISDN PVC Connections Management and Communication Auto Backup Criteria Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save Changing an Auto Configuration setting can also change the FrameSaver unit s configuration See Setting Up Auto Configuration for additional information 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 3 Configuration Configuration Option Areas The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings which are located in the Factory Default Configuration option area You can find the default settings for configuration options in the m FrameSaver SLV 9626 Quick Reference m Configuration Opt
191. have not been configured in the unit These DLCIs pass through the unit transparently without being monitored and with no demultiplexing multiplexing of management diagnostics or user data being performed Only DLCIs on the Net1 FR1 and Port 1 frame relay links appear on this screen nonconfigured DLCls on other links are discarded March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 9 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status Field Status What It Indicates DLCI Identifies the Local Management Interface reported DLCI numbers assigned to the selected interface the identifying number assigned to the path between two frame relay FrameSaver units ports 16 through 1007 DLCI statuses are listed in ascending order i e lowest number first Status LMI reported status of the DLCI m Whether the DLCI is active capable of carrying data in the frame relay network Active relay network Inactive m Whether it is inactive in the frame Deleted 1 Whether it has been deleted by the frame relay network or New frame relay network m Whether it has been created by the CIR bps 0 64000 Displays the committed information rate reported by the Stratacom switch CIR information only appears in this column when LMI Protocol is set to Standard If blank the switch does not support this feature Appears for 10 seconds only before the network changes Delet
192. he Alarms and Events Groups of RMON1 when a selected variable s configured threshold is exceeded Enable Sends trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded Disable Does not send trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded March 2000 3 59 Configuration 3 60 Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 4 of 5 Trap Dial Out Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable cca a O O Controls whether SNMP trap messages initiate a call automatically If the call cannot be completed and the Call Retry option is set to Enable the SNMP trap message is held queued until the call completes to either the Alarm or alternate directory NOTE When the modem port is configured as a network communication link up to 10 SNMP trap messages are held at the port Enable Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Directory Number A Alarm Disable Automatic calls will not be initiated Traps sent to the modem are held until a dial in connection is established Trap Disconnect Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Trap Disconnect o O E ANN Determines whether the internal modem disconnects after the SNMP trap message has been sent This configuration option only applies to modem connections initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message Enable Disconnects the call after sending an SNMP trap messag
193. he LMI report LMI Protocol is set to Standard and the network s CIR changed String CIR on SifString changed to CIR bps enterpriseConfig Change 6 m devLastTrapString Configuration has been changed devHealthAndStatus via the menu driven user mib interface an SNMP Manager or auto configuration after 60 seconds has elapsed without another change String Device configuration change m devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib m devFrExtDiciDici devFrExt mib m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus enterpriseDLCI mib DLCI Status is set to Inactive the Down 11 DLCI is down Strings SifString down Due to LMI or physical failure The DLCI has been deleted The network no longer supports the DLCI and it was removed enterpriseDLCI delete 17 Strings SifString deleted by Auto DLCI delete SifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown enterpriseDLCIUp 1 2 DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI is up again String SifString up March 2000 B 13 Table B 7 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 2 of 2 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseMissedSLV Down 16 enterpriseMissedSLV Up 116 enterpriseRMON ResetToDefault 13 enterpriseSelfTest Fail 2 enterpriseTest Start 5 enterpriseTest Stop 105 devFrExtDicilflnde
194. hich interfaces will generate linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific trap messages These traps are not supported on the COM port or modem port Network Generates these trap messages on the network interface only Ports Generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the user data port only DBM For units with ISDN backup capability generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the DBM only All Generates these trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all interfaces except for the COM port or modem port that are applicable to the FrameSaver model DLCI Traps on Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports DBM All Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for individual DLCIs These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces Network Generates these trap messages on DLCls for the network interface only Ports Generates these trap messages for DLCls on a user data port only DBM For units with ISDN backup capability generates trap messages on DLCls for the DBM only All Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces RMON Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s RMON traps are typically sent as a result of t
195. hooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer TS Management Link is initially disabled in most models but the link can be enabled at any time Any valid network Management PVC created on a standard DLCI can be used When enabled a troubleshooting link can be accessed any time the service provider requests access An assigned security level can also control access When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooting management link the link is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry screen with the This PVC has been designated as the TS Management Link message NOTE The unit may come from the factory with a TS Management PVC already set up e g 980 Table 3 11 Node IP Options 1 of 3 Node IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node IP address with zeros Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node Since the s
196. igible bit set The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications BEONS are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with forward explicit congestion notifications The network sends FECNS to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Frame Relay Performance Statistics 9626 A2 GB20 00 The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu Status Performance Statistics Frame Relay All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The NextLink and PrevLink function keys only appear when multiple frame relay links have been configured Table 5 16 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 1 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Link Frames Sent The number of frames sent over the interface Frames Received The number of frames received over the interface a aa Characters Sent The number of data octets bytes sent over the interface Characters Received The number of data octets bytes received over the interface FECNs
197. ilities are desired March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation This chapter tells you how to access use and navigate the menu driven user interface It includes the following Logging On Main Menu Screen Work Areas Navigating the Screens Keyboard Keys Function Keys Selecting from a Menu Switching Between Screen Areas Selecting a Field Entering Information What appears on the screens depends on 9626 A2 GB20 00 Current configuration How your network is currently configured Security access level The security level set by the system administrator for each user Data selection criteria What you entered in previous screens March 2000 2 1 User Interface and Basic Operation Logging On otart a session using one of the following methods m Telnet session via An in band management channel through the frame relay network Alocal in band management channel configured on the DTE port between the FrameSaver unit and the router m Dial in connection using the internal modem m Direct terminal connection over the COM port When logging on the User Interface Idle screen appears m f no security was set up or security was disabled the Main Menu screen appears see page 2 4 You can begin your session m If security was set up and is enabled you are prompted for a login Enter your login ID and password When the user interface has bee
198. imiting the IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to communicate with the unit Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management SNMP Management Enable See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about SNMP management configuration options B Procedure To limit SNMP access through IP addresses 1 Select the SNMP NMS Security options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication SNMP NMS Security 2 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate 4 10 Enable IP address checking Specify the number between 1 and 10 of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit Specify the IP address es that identifies the SNMP manager s authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit Specify the access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validates is performed 3 Sa
199. ing Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Describes setup of the NetScout Manager Plus application so it supports FrameSaver units Chapter 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Describes setup of Concord s Network Health application so reports can be created for FrameSaver units and identifies those reports that apply to FrameSaver units Appendix A Menu Hierarchy Contains a graphical representation of how the user interface screens are organized Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Identifies the MIBs supported and how they can be downloaded describes the unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features and describes the RMON specific user history groups and alarm and event defaults Appendix C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Shows the rear panel tells what cables are needed and provides pin assignments for interfaces and cables Appendix D Technical Specifications Appendix E Equipment List Index Lists key terms acronyms concepts and sections A master glossary of terms and acronyms used in Paradyne documents is available on the World Wide Web at www paradyne com Select Library Technical Manuals Technical Glossary X March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 About This Guide Purpose and Intended Audience Document Organization 9626 A2 GB20 00 This document contains information that applies to the Model 9626 FrameSaver Service
200. ing the Unit and Restoring Communication You can reset the unit in one of four ways Reset it from the Control menu Cycle the power Reset the configuration options for the COM port or reload the factory default settings Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS see your NMS documentation The unit performs a self test when it is reset Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Use this procedure to initiate a reset and power on self test of the unit B Procedure To reset the unit from the Control menu js 2 From the Main Menu screen select Control Select Reset Device and press Enter The Are You Sure prompt appears Type y Yes and press Enter The unit reinitializes itself performing a self test Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Disconnecting then reconnecting the power cord resets the unit 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 6 3 Troubleshooting Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Misconfiguring the unit could render the menu driven user interface inaccessible If this occurs connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly connected asynchronous terminal B Procedure To reset COM port settings 1 Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19 2 kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity In addition set Flow Control to None 2 Reset the unit then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen appears See Resetti
201. intenance Table 5 13 Last Cause Value Messages 6 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do Suspended Call A call resume has been 1 Verify the number in the Exists But Not attempted but no Inbound Calling ID Call ID suspended call exists for field for the suspended this phone number call Reissue the Call Resume command using the correct number Temporary Failure Network is not functioning Wait and try again correctly but the condition is not expected to continue for long Unallocated Destination requested Assign the Inbound Number cannot be reached because Calling ID the Inbound Calling ID number is not assigned or allocated User Access Network was unable to No action is needed Information deliver the access Discarded information when trying to establish the call User Alerting During call establishment 1 Verify that the remote No Answer an alerting was received device is operational but a connection was not and configured to answer 2 Retry the call User Busy Called number cannot Wait and try again receive the call 5 34 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Performance Statistics Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a selected interface Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the severity and frequency or duration of a condition Main Menu Status Performance Statistics Physical and link layer s
202. interface goes down disabling Port 1 and deasserting its control leads When LMI on the network interface comes back up Port 1 is reenabled and its control leads are reasserted The LMI state on Port 1 has no effect on the LMI state on the network interface That is Port 1 s LMI follows the network interface s LMI This setting is useful if the router connected to Port 1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected Port 1 Codependent with Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down or LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the other interface That is the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other Use this setting when backup is through the router instead of the unit It is not recommended since it makes fault isolation more difficult 3 24 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 2 of 2 LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures th
203. interface that were more than 8192 octets in length Long Rx Frames The device on the far end of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to DLCls outside the valid range that is a number less than 16 or greater than 1007 The device on the far end of the circuit may have been configured incorrectly or the DLCIs configured for the FrameSaver unit may not match the DLCIs supplied by the service provider Unknown DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to unknown DLCls The DLCI may not have been configured or it has been configured to be Inactive Indicates that the FrameSaver units or devices at both or either end of the circuit have been configured incorrectly Unknown Error The number of frames received over the interface that do not fall into one of the other statistic categories Indicates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize Frame Relay LMI LMI Protocol The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link Normal condition Status Msg Received The number of LMI status messages received over the interface Normal condition Total LMI Errors The number of LMI errors Reliability errors protocol errors unknown report types unknown information elements and sequence errors are included in this total Network problems Number of Inactives The number of times the LMI h
204. ion Configuring the Modem Port Select Modem Port from the Management and Communication menu to configure the modem port see Table 3 18 Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Modem Port Table 3 18 Modem Port Options 1 of 4 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the modem port NOTE If the Default IP Destination is set to Modem see Table 3 11 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The modem port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The modem port is a network communications link to the IP network Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Controls whether external devices can dial in to the system through the internal modem This allows dial in access by a remote terminal when Port Use is set to Terminal When Port Use is set to Net Link Dial In Access must be set to Enable to allow an external NMS to dial in to the device Enable Dial in access is allowed Incoming calls are answered Disable Dial in access is not allowed Incoming calls are not answered Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the mod
205. ion Tables If the factory default settings do not support your network s configuration you can customize the configuration options to better suit your application Four configuration option storage areas are available Configuration Option Area Description Current Configuration The currently active set of configuration options Customer Configuration 1 An alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Customer Configuration 2 Another alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Default Factory Configuration A read only configuration area containing the factory default set of configuration options You can load and edit default factory configuration settings but you can only save those changes to the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration option areas The Current Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration option areas are identical to the Default Factory Configuration until modified by the customer 3 4 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 9626 A2 GB20 00 To access and display configuration options load copy the applicable configuration option set into the edit area B Procedure To load a set of configuration options for editing 1 From the Main Menu press the down arrow key so the cursor is on Configuration Press Enter to display the Configurati
206. istics Statistic What It Indicates Total Call Attempts Number of call attempts made by the DBM Total Calls Originated Number of successful calls made by the DBM Total Calls Answered Number of successful calls answered by the DBM Total Calls Rejected Security Number of calls rejected by the DBM due to security Total Calls Rejected Other Number of calls rejected by the DBM due to reasons other than security Average Call Duration mins Average amount of time in minutes that successful calls take Longest Call Duration mins Amount of time spent in minutes during the longest successful call Total Call Duration mins Sum of all successful calls in minutes 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 45 Operation and Maintenance Modem Operation This section includes the following m Manually Disconnecting the Modem m Verifying Modem Operation See Setting Up the Modem in Chapter 3 Configuration for additional information Manually Disconnecting the Modem If Trap Disconnect is disabled a modem connection remains until it is manually disconnected Select Disconnect Modem from the Control menu Main Menu Control Disconnect Modem Respond yes to the Are you sure prompt Verifying Modem Operation B gt Procedure If Port Use is set to Terminal dial in access 1 Dial the modem s phone number using a remote VT100 compatible asynchronous terminal or PC 2 Verify that the Main Menu appears
207. itions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options and perform device testing Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can monitor and display status and configuration screens only 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 63 Configuration Table 3 17 Communication Port Options 3 of 4 Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable an a O O Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is disconnected Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes inclusive IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 2
208. ived Check the attached device Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface It clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 596 m Network cable problem Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends m Network facility problem m Contact your network provider frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface March 2000 6 9 Troubleshooting 6 10 Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 4 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Check the router connected to the COM port Network Com Link Down No Signal at Network 1 hhh mm ss 3 OOF at Network 1 hhh mm ss 3 OOS at Network 1 hhh mm ss 3 SLV Timeout DLCI nnnn frame relay link 1 4 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 The communication link for the COM port is down and the COM port is configured for Net Link A No Signal NS condition has been detected on the DDS network interface followed by the period of time that the condition has existed An Out of Frame OOF condition has been detected on the DDS network interface followed by the perio
209. k DSU Loopback Inactive Inactive Pattern Tests Send 511 Monitor 511 Inactive Active Errors 999994 Ctrl a to access these functions ResetMon ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit The ResetMon function key at the bottom of the screen only appears when a Monitor 511 test pattern is Active Select ResetMon to reset the monitor pattern error counter CAUTION You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached you must disconnect the frame relay equipment and use external test equipment 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 6 23 Troubleshooting CSU External Network Loopback CSU Loopback loops the received signal on the network interface back to the network This loopback is an external loopback that is located as close as possible to the network interface Main Menu Test Network Physical Tests CSU Loopback DTE DTE Aggregate DDS Port Interface Nabal ort FrameSaver Access Unit 497 14929 02 CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the PVCs assigned to the network interface In addition IP data sent over the PVC will be disrupted while this test is active DSU Internal Network Loopback 6 24 DSU loopback loops the received signal on the network interface back to the network without affecting operation of other ports The signal is looped on the DTE side of the FrameSaver unit This loopback is an internal loopback that is located as close as possible to the customer i
210. kbps and 64 kbps clear channel 4 wire service frame relay service RJ48S CA48S 6 position modular unkeyed USOC RJ11C jack Up to 14 4 kbps PPP SLIP 8 position modular unkeyed USOC RJ49C jack specified in ISO IEC 8877 BRI NI 1 56 kbps and 64 kbps ANSI T1 601 1992 physical layer Bellcore SR NWT 001937 Issue 1 February 1991 ITU Q 921 1992 link layer ITU Q 931 1993 network layer TR TSY 00860 ISDN Calling Number Identification Services February 1989 and Supplement June 1990 National ISDN 1 NI 1 Capability Package B for 1B channel service or Capability Package for 2B channel support supporting up to two B channels 13 5 dBm nominal over frequency band 0 Hz 80 kHz 135 Q Operates on 2 wire loops defined in ANSI T1 601 1992 135 Q 2B1Q line coding with 4 level amplitude modulation PAM at 80 kbps baud Automatic adaptive equalizer with echo cancellation 9626 A2 GB20 00 Equipment List Equipment See page E 2 for cables you can order Model Feature Description Number FrameSaver SLV Units FrameSaver SLV 9626 DDS unit with an integral modem but 9626 A1 201 without the built in ISDN BRI DBM and up to 8 PVCs Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Heference FrameSaver SLV 9626 DDS unit with an integral modem a built in 9626 A1 202 ISDN BRI DBM and up to 8 PVCs Includes 1 Slot Hou
211. ks for the originating DBM interface only See Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options for configuration information 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 19 Configuration Backup Over the Network Interface Generally backup can be performed on the network interface s frame relay link as well on an ISDN link the unit does not have to have the built in ISDN DBM feature In this case create a DLCI Record on the network interface that will be used for backup then modify the PVC Connections or Management PVCs to add the alternate destination Setting Up Management FrameSaver units are already set up for SNMP management with Community Name 1 set to Public and Name 1 Access set to Read Write For remote sites other than the IP Address this is all that is required Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management See Table 3 13 General SNMP Management Options for configuration information For the central site local management between the unit and the router must be set up as well see Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site Set up a local management PVC between the central site unit and its router for local management control by the end user customer B gt Procedure To set up management through the router 1 Create a DLCI that will be used for management on the user data port Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records 2 Cre
212. kup calls typically the remote site and has its ISDN Link Status option set to Auto To place a test call Main Menu Test gt ISDN PVC Tests Test Call When a test call is started Active appears in the Status column While the call is Active the status of the call connection and the link appears in the Results column A Frame Relay Link Up message indicates that the required calls have been made and the link is successfully passing LMI data A Frame Relay Link Suboptimal message indicates that at least one call has been made on the link the link is successfully passing LMI data but the Maximum Link Rate configured in the ISDN Link Profile has not been achieved for the link A Frame Relay Link Down message indicates that the call attempts were not successful NOTE Primary network data is not affected by a test call If there is a network failure while a test call is active the test call is terminated and the call is automatically converted to a backup call 6 22 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Physical Tests A FrameSaver 9626 unit s physical tests screen for the network interface is shown below For the user data port only the DTE Loopback is available Main Menu 5 Test gt Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests Physical Tests Screen Example main test network 9626 Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 NETWORK 1 PHYSICAL TESTS Test Command Status Results Local Loopbacks CSU Loopbac
213. lect the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window The modified elements are saved to the database and the units are polled Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for data to be gathered before running any reports 9 4 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Grouping Elements for Reports 9626 A2 GB20 00 Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made the newly discovered elements DLCIs should be organized into a group for Health reporting Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node types e g all SLV elements Once grouped you can then run reports on all DLCls in the network as well as reports on individual DLC Is B gt Procedure To group elements 1 From the console select Edit Groups from the Reports menu The Add Groups dialog box opens 2 Enter a name in the Group Name field Up to 64 characters can be entered A through Z a through z O through 9 dashes periods and underscores can be used No spaces can be included and the word All cannot be used 3 Select the WAN radio button above the Available Elements list 4 Highlight all the DLCls listed on the Available Elements list or select specific DLCls then select the left arrow button The highlighted DLCls move from the Available Elements list to the Group Members list 5 Select the OK button when a
214. les 8 13 Cross Pair Detected linkDown trap B 10 Detection status CSU Loopback 6 24 CTS control lead CTS down CTS down to Port Device current software revision oo A 9626 A2 GB20 00 D Data Delivery Ratio DDR 1 2 Link Control Identifier DLCI Mode Port physical options port connector pin assignments Rate Kbps selection criteria uploading SLV and packet capture Data Channel Loopback 3 30 p 18 Date amp Time setting 3 8 DBM call performance statistics configuring interface configuring to send traps connector forcing backup and placing a call interface status ISDN problems 6 14 test status messages tests 6 16 updating software verifying setup 5 49 DDR DDS configuring network interface Line Rate Kbps physical network Line statistics network cable network connector DE Set Default IP Destination 3 46 Delete key deleting a login 4 12 Destination 3 58 Default IP DLCl 3 42 3 43 EDLCI 3 42 3 43 Link 3 42 3 43 Device messages troubleshooting problems 6 11 dial backup 3 14 Dial In Access 3 66 controlling 9626 A2 GB20 00 Index Dial Out Delay Time Min Directory 3 61 options 3 9 3 57 Trap 3 60 Directory Alternate Dial Out disabling SNMP access disaster recovery 3 20 Discard Eligible DE Disconnect modem Time Minutes 3 54 B 64 3 67 disco
215. ll appropriate DLCIs have been moved to the Group Members list The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on the Groups dialog box See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That chapter also tells you how to customize reports March 2000 9 5 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Generating Reports for a Group Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCIs and the DLCIs have been grouped you can start generating reports When selecting a report Section select WAN from the drop down list See Hunning Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report generation NOTE Network Health provides information with each chart or table generally referred to as a report Click on the hyperlink Explanation of for an explanation of the report and its features You can also refer to the Network Health Reports Guide About Service Level Reports For long term analysis and reporting you will want to license the Service Level Reports application This application analyzes data collected over months or by quarters and provides service level information about an enterprise a region department or business process Executive IT Manager and Customer Service Level reports are provided Using these reports you
216. lt opecifies the alternate destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a backup connection Display Conditions This option only appears when the Alternate Destination DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 43 Configuration Setting Up Management and Communication Options The following options can be selected from the Management and Communication menu m Node IP Options m Management PVC Options m General SNMP Management Options m Telnet and FTP Sessions Options m SNMP NMS Security Options m SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options m Communication Port Options m Modem Port Options m Auto Backup Criteria Options 3 44 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring Node IP Information 9626 A2 GB20 00 Select Node IP to display add or change the information necessary to support general IP communications for the node see Table 3 11 When deploying units to remote sites minimally configure the Node IP Address and Subnet Mask Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication Node IP This set of configuration options includes a Troubleshooting TS Management Link feature to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link Troubles
217. m Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out m Setting Up Auto Configuration Selecting a Frame Helay Discovery Mode Automatically Removing a Circuit m Setting Up Dial Backup Setting Up the DBM Physical Interface Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration Modifying ISDN Link Profiles Restricting Automatic Backup Configuring the DBM Interface to Send SNMP Traps m Backup Over the Network Interface 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 1 Configuration Setting Up Management Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site Setting Up Back to Back Operation Changing Operating Mode Configuration Option Tables Configuring the Overall System Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System Configuring Service Level Verification Options Configuring General System Options Configuring the Physical Interfaces Configuring the Network Interface Configuring the User Data Port Configuring the ISDN BRI DBM Interface Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface Manually Configuring DLCI Records Configuring PVC Connections Setting Up Management and Communication Options Configuring Node IP Information Configuring Management PVCs Configuring General SNMP Management Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Confi
218. mance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance statistics Performance Statistics Frame Relay Use the ClrDDsStats function key to reset the DDS network line performance statistics Performance Statistics DDS Line Use the CIrDBMStats function key to reset the DBM call performance statistics Performance Statistics DBM Call March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 9626 A2 GB20 00 These statistics appear when Service Level Verification SLV is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu Status Performance Statistics Service Level Verification They only appear for the network interface and only if DLCIs are multiplexed Table 5 14 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Far End Circuit Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI VCI Virtual Path Identifier Virtual Channel Identifier at the other end of the connection If the far end circuit is a DLCI the DLCI number 16 1007 appears If a VPI VCI the number is displayed as xx yyy xx being the VPI number 0 15 and yyy being the VCI number 32 2047 None appears if the unit has not communicated with the other end Far End IP Addr IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI conne
219. me time the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes being made For instance Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration changes made via another method to be lost If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and saves them your changes would be lost 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 7 Configuration Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units At a minimum the following configuration options must be set before deploying a a FrameSaver unit to a remote site m Node IP Address m Node Subnet Mask See Table 3 11 Node IP Options for a description of these options Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the unit its location and a contact for the unit as well as to set the system clock Main Menu Control System Information The following information is available for viewing Save any entries or changes If the selection is Enter the Device Name Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters System Name SNMP system name can be up to 255 characters System Location System Location System s physical location can be up to 255 characters s physical System s physical location can be up to 255 characters can be up to 255 characters System Contact Name and how to contact the system person can be up to 255 characters Date
220. med and is associated with the trap ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable Example DLCI 100 Chicago to New York of Network DDS frame relay link Net1 FR1 In this example a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap The unit supports the following traps warmsStart authenticationFailure linkUp and linkDown enterprise Specific RMON Specific These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 B 7 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Trap warmStart This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized Table B 3 warmStart Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause warmstart FrameSaver unit has just m Reset command sent reinitialized and stabilized itself Variable Binding String Variable Binding Unit reset devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Power disruption Trap authenticationFailure B 8 This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to lack of authentication Table B 4 authenticationFailure Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure Access to the FrameSaver SNMP protocol message not unit was attempted and properly authenticated failed ailed m Three unsuccessful attempts were made to enter a correct login user ID password combination IP Address security is enabled and
221. n Stats Type Trap Variable Key Key2 Type Threshold Severity Script Description Community Edit Trap USRDEF E Ethernet Stats EN Drop Events m 40 500 Jfibsolute 9 Delta Rising _ Falling Both 345000 5000 1 p SLY Frames Snt Rising Thresh Falling Threshold Reached public public Trap Number Check every i 4 Edit any trap defaults that may be required See Step 4 of Adding SLV Alarms Manually for field settings you may want to change 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply your changes The window closes and the Configuration Manager main window reappears 6 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to apply your changes Refer to Editing Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to change alarm thresholds 8 10 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Manually Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be defined and assigned to each DLCI When configuring alarms manually every alarm must be configured for each DLCI that is if there are eight alarms and 20 DLCIs 160 trap configurations must be created 8 x 20 For this reason it is recommended that the OpenLane defaults be used Follow the procedure below to configure alarms manually To load OpenLane default setting
222. n about the Alternate Destination fields see Configuring PVC Connections in Chapter 3 Configuration If the No PVC Connections message appears instead of a list of PVC connections no PVC connections have been configured yet 5 22 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 10 PVC Connection Status 1 of 2 Field Status What It Indicates Link Identifies the cross connection of DLCls configured for the unit Net1 FR1 m Source destination is frame relay link 1 on Network 1 Port 1 m User data port Port 1 Mgmt PVC Name m Virtual circuit is a management link that terminates in the unit where Name is the link name DLCI 16 to 1007 For standard DLCls Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI EDLCI 0 to 62 For multiplexed DLCIs only Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 23 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 10 PVC Connection Status 2 of 2 Field Status What It Indicates Status Identifies whether the physical interfaces LMIs and DLCls are all enabled and active for this PVC connection Active 1 The PVC is currently active Inactive m he PVC is inactive because Alarm conditions and network and SLV communication status indicate that data cannot be successfully passed The unit has disabled the interface or frame relay link due to internal operating conventions
223. n idle a session is automatically ended and the screen goes blank when the unit times out Press Enter to reactivate the interface B Procedure To log in when security is being enforced 1 Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter 2 Type your Password and press Enter Valid characters All printable ASCII characters Number of characters Up to 10 characters can be entered in the Login ID and Password fields Case sensitive Yes An asterisk appears in the password field for each character entered 2 2 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation If your login was Then the Valid Main Menu appears see page 2 4 Begin your session Invalid Message Invalid Password appears on line 24 and the Login screen is redisplayed After three unsuccessful attempts A Telnet session is closed The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly connected terminal An external modem is disconnected The internal modem connection is disconnected An SNMP trap is generated Access is denied See your system administrator to verify your login Login ID Password combination If two sessions are already active wait and try again m f attempting to access the unit through Telnet the local Telnet client process returns a Connection refused message at the bottom of the screen m f attempting to access the unit over the COM port or modem port not via T
224. n information Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site When management needs to be set up between a service provider s customer and its network operations center NOC a non multiplexed DLCI must be configured to carry management data between the customer s central site and the NOC console This requires that a frame relay discovered DLCI needs to be modified This is because all auto configured network DLCIs are configured as multiplexed DLCls B Procedure To set up NOC management 1 Select DLCI Records on the network interface Configuration Network DLCI Records 2 Select Modify The Modify DLCI Record for DLCI Number prompt appears 3 Select the DLCI that will be used by pressing the spacebar until the correct DLCI number appears then select it 4 Change the DLCI Type from Multiplexed to Standard he DLCI in connections Update DLCI usage as follows prompt appears 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 21 Configuration 5 Selectthe Delete EDLCI Connections and Make a Mgmt Only PVC option PVC connections for the selected DLCI are broken the Port 1 DLCI mapped to this network DLCI and the embedded management DLCI EDLCI are deleted and the selected DLCI will be reconfigured as a management PVC using the Node IP Address See Table 3 9 DLCI Record Options for configuration information Setting Up Back to Back Operation Using this special feature you can set up two FrameSaver units that
225. n options Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and run tests Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options they cannot change configuration options or run tests 3 6 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Saving Configuration Options When changes to the configuration options are complete use the Save function key to save your changes to either the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas NOTE When changing settings you must Save for changes to take effect B Procedure To save the configuration option changes 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen 2 Type sor S to select the Save function and press Enter The Save Configuration To screen appears NOTE If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes a Save Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response f you select No the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes are not saved If you select Yes the Save Configuration To screen appears 3 Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes usually the Current Configuration and press Enter When Save is complete Comnand Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen NOTE There are other methods of changing configurations like SNMP and Auto Configuration Since multiple sessions can be active at the sa
226. n the fct file is transferred 3 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 4 Edit any alarm values that need to be changed 5 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to load alarms for the unit This may take some time so please be patient See Editing Alarms if any default settings need to be changed 8 8 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Editing Alarms B Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens Propertv Editor Custom amp Domain RT Delay Proxy SNMP Properties File Grenadabs Type FrameRelay Logging Domain Stat Host Cony ART DLC Trap Variable Rising Falling DLCI USRIEF FrSent elta 46000 45000 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Edit button to the right of the list The Edit Trap window opens 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 8 9 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Domai
227. ndicates It Indicates DLCI Up Since ka Date and time that the LL c MR was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the time that the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the first time the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network DLCI Up Time Days hours minutes and seconds since the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the amount of time since the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the amount of time since the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network Total Tx Frames Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes Tx Octets transmitted for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link m Within CIR The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device for on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate Between CIR amp EIR m The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate m Above EIR The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate m With DE Set m he number of frames and octets sent on the select
228. nfiguring frame relay and Down 5 16 6 9 Error Event N2 3 25 3 36 frame relay statistics Heartbeat T1 3 25 3 36 Inbound Heartbeat T2 3 25 3 37 N4 Measurement Period T3 3 25 3 37 packet utility 6 5 Parameters pass through 3 24 Protocol Status Enquiry N1 3 25 3 36 uploading packet capture data local external DTE loopback 3 32 setting up management locked out 4 3 4 11 6 4 logging in logging out Login creating 4 11 ID 4 11 modifying and deleting Required 3 53 B 63 B 66 4 3 4 5 4 6 logins IN 6 Loopback CSU DSU DSU Latching 3 30 DTE latching 6 25 Port DTE Initiated PVC LOS at Network 5 17 6 9 M Main Menu screen branch 2 4 making input selections Management and Communication options General SNMP options OpenLane 5 0 PVCs 3 48 total number dedicated setting up local 3 20 SNMP troubleshooting link manually placing a call MDM connector menu branches Configuration main path selecting from Menus messages Device Health and Status 5 15 Last Cause Values Self Test Results system System and Test Status Test Status MFR MIB access downloading support minimal remote configuration March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Mode changing Operating demos Data LED 5 6 Operating 5 27 Test model number modem connector manually disconnecting oper
229. ng OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Interval 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit s frame relay link interfaces They are created during RMON initialization Rising Falling Threshold Threshold Default Default 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 in the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link B 18 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 2 of 2 Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID Interval Default Default Tx Total Errors MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs 15 mins Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Rx Overruns MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs 15 mins Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Tx Underruns MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs Tag devFrExtLinkTx 15 mins Underruns OI
230. ng the Unit and Restoring Communication for other methods of resetting the unit 3 Tab to the desired prompt and type y Yes at one of the prompts If selecting The following occurs Reset COM Port usage Port Use is set to Terminal so the asynchronous terminal can be used Data Rate Kbps Character Length Stop Bits and Parity are reset to the factory defaults Unit resets itself Reload Factory Defaults All configuration and control settings are reset to the Default Factory Configuration overwriting the current configuration Unit resets itself CAUTION This causes the current configuration to be destroyed and a self test to be performed If no selection is made within 30 seconds or if No n is entered the unit resets itself and no configuration changes are made Once the unit resets itself connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears 6 4 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Management Link Feature A dedicated troubleshooting management link is available to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link and troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 3 Configuration for additional information about this fea
231. nterface s menu to display or change the Frame Relay options for an individual interface see Table 3 8 Main Menu Configuration Network Data Ports Frame Relay See Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System for additional information Table 3 8 Interface Frame Relay Options 1 of 3 LMI Protocol Possible Settings Initialize From Net1FR1 Initialize From Interface Auto On LMI Fail Standard Annex A Annex D Default Setting For user data port links Initialize From Interface For network links Auto On LMI Fail Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery source for the LMI protocol Initialize From Net1FR1 The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol initially discovered on the primary Network frame relay link Net1FR1 LMI Protocol is set to None internally but once a protocol has become active or is set on the primary Network link the protocol will be set to the same value on this link Standard Annex A or Annex D The protocol will not be updated based on changes to Net1FR1 after being set initially Display Conditions This option value only appears for a user data port Initialize From Interface The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or DTE device Once a protocol has become active the protocol will be set t
232. nterface serving the DTE Main Menu Test Network Physical Tests DSU Loopback DSU CSU Aggregate DTE DDS du LE Interface il Network Port FrameSaver Access Unit 497 14933 02 CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the PVCs assigned to the network interface In addition IP data sent over the PVC will be disrupted while this test is active March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Latching Loopback A latching loopback is a network initiated DSU Loopback Once a DSU Loopback is started the FrameSaver unit remains in loopback until it receives the loopback release sequence from the network The latching loopback code is a control sequence as opposed to a bipolar violation sequence therefore user data may cause the FrameSaver unit to activate the loopback Main Menu Configuration Network Physical Disable the DSU Latching Loopback configuration option to stop the latching loopback when the network did not command the test Send 511 This test sends the 511 test pattern over the selected interface The 511 test pattern is a pseudo random bit sequence PRBS that is 511 bits long on the data ports only This is a PRBS 2 1 test Main Menu 5 Test gt Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests gt Send 511 When sending or monitoring a 511 test pattern using an external loopback connector on the network or DTE port you must follow the sequence below for these tests to run correctl
233. ntifier to identify the calling unit and switches PVC connections as specified by the user No additional security is required Disabling ISDN Access B gt Procedure 4 4 To disable ISDN access 1 Select the ISDN Physical options Main Menu Configuration ISDN Physical 2 Set Interface Status to Disable 3 Save your change See Configuring the ISDN BRI DBM Interface in Chapter 3 Configuration tor more information about ISDN BRI DBM configuration options March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins Controlling Telnet or FTP Access The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or FTP session Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or on a service provider s troubleshooting TS management link Limiting Telnet Access Telnet access can be limited by m Disabling Telnet access completely m Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the TS Management Link m Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions m Disabling TS Management Link access To limit Telnet access via a service provider s troubleshooting management link see Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link B Procedure To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configura
234. ntrol lead This indicator should always be on March 2000 5 7 Operation and Maintenance Device Messages These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens All device messages are listed in alphabetical order Table 5 5 Device Messages 1 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Access level is n User s access level is 2 No action needed Read only or 3 user is not authorized to change configurations Already Active Test selected is already m Allow test to continue running m Select another test m Stop the test Blank Entries New had been selected m No action needed Removed from the Administer Logins screen no entry was made then Save was selected Reenter the Login ID Password and Access Level Cannot delete Trap Delete was selected from No action needed or configure Manager the Management PVCs another path for traps and try Options screen but the again PVC had been defined as a trap destination Command Complete Configuration has been No action needed saved or all tests have been aborted Connection Refused Two menu driven user Wait and try again interface sessions are Seen i an FTP already in use when a terminal Telnet session was attempted Destination Not Destination entered is Enter another destination Unique already being used indicator DLCI in connection User tried to delete a DLCI m No action needed or Delete connection first that was part of a
235. nu 6 3 Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 6 3 Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit 6 4 Troubleshooting Management Link Feature 6 5 LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature 0 0 ccc ccc ee eee 6 5 Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface 6 6 PAIS 26 4265 0400848 25855 060 85 Se NSE SIRE Seog sh AU ee Ed DAMA DA NAE 6 Troubleshooting Wales occ crsceeenetaracteeusneeueiereeetaedeee ses 6 11 Bie CA AA 6 11 Frame Relay PVC Problems a 6 13 DON ee O CU AA PAA 6 14 LE rito m 6 15 lest NIU FT BA DRA PANGHABANG AN AKN AN GANA 6 16 BE AA cease o3 APA 6 16 Starting and Stopping a Test 0 6 17 Aborting AA AA ESSE SEATS 6 18 wm i A C 6 19 mut eco a Kan ap a AA AG GN AG AA SG 6 20 S PP ETEEN EE PEETER NEEE KNANG EN AA 6 21 Montor Pale ue tad eee sod Ina m m AA AE 6 21 Mugen A H R 6 22 io EAE E E E E E EE EE TETT 6 22 ao GAWA EE eine NN ANE EAE a E E EET 6 23 CSU External Network Loopback 00 cee ee eens 6 24 DSU Internal Network Loopback 00 cece eee eee 6 24 Lalernino LOODDSEN Xa AA ANA AIDA AGANG Gg a maps BAHAG 6 25 s gig L 6 25 Viste deg MENTRE T RET ETT ee tt i T 6 26 Pe o s e e Ganda NAA Kaka KNA AURA AURA dd 6 26 ee Me Peel erare r rAr ERNS 6 27 Bo ea
236. o compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software FrameSaver SLV Service Level Verifier 9626 units operate with other FrameSaver devices and when teamed with internationally based FrameSaver devices in multinational applications provides a complete global frame relay management solution 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 1 1 About the FrameSaver SLV 9626 FrameSaver SLV 9626 Features The FrameSaver SLV 9626 provides the following features 1 2 Intelligent Service Level Verification Provides accurate throughput latency and availability measurements to determine network performance and whether service level agreements SLAs are being met along with SLA reporting SLA parameter thresholds can be configured to provide proactive notification of a developing network problem In addition the frame size used in latency measurements can be configured Security Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access to the unit TruePut Technology Using Frame Delivery Ratios FDR and Data Delivery Ratios DDR throughput within and above CIR as well as between CIR and EIR and above EIR can be measured precisely eliminating inaccuracies due to averaging These ratios are available through OpenLane SLV reports Frame Relay Aware Management Supports diagnostic and network management features over the frame relay network using the Annex A Annex D and Standard UNI User Network Interface LMI managem
237. o the protocol discovered Standard Annex A or Annex D on the frame relay link The protocol will not be updated after being initially discovered Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls Frame relay links on the network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Auto On LMI Fail The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device whenever an LMI Link Down failure occurs This option is available for frame relay links on the Port and network interfaces Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from LMI status polls by attached DTE devices Frame relay links on the network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Standard Supports Standard LMI and the Stratacom enhancements to the Standard LMI Annex A Supports LMI as specified by Q 933 Annex A Annex D Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1 617 Annex D 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 35 Configuration Table 3 8 Interface Frame Relay Options 2 of 3 LMI Parameters Possible Settings System Custom Default Setting System Allows you to use the system LMI options or to set specific LMI options for this interface
238. omatically performed when the primary physical link or LMI or a DLCI on a PVC connection fails When enabled the access unit automatically enables the Alternate Link configuration option and establishes an alternate DLCI and EDLCI rerouting traffic over the backup interface See Table 3 12 Management PVC Options to configure the alternate DLCI and alternate EDLCI NOTE Auto Backup cannot be enabled unless LMI Behavior is set to Independent see Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Enable Reroutes traffic over the backup alternate interface Disable Does not reroute traffic over the backup interface When Auto Backup Allowed Possible Settings Always Restrict Default Setting Always Determines when backup for the access unit is allowed to occur Always No restrictions on backup Restrict Backup is restricted to the day and time selected in the following configuration options Use this selection when the importance of the data that you are backing up is day time dependent Backup Allowed Day From nn nn Possible Settings 00 00 23 00 None Default Setting 00 00 Specifies the time that Auto Backup can begin for a selected day of the week in increments of 1 hour Day is Monday through Sunday 00 00 23 00 Specifies the time of day that Auto Backup will start for this particular day None Auto Backup cannot occur on this day Backup Allowed Day To nn nn Possible Settings 00 00
239. on Net Link The COM port is the network communications link to the IP network or IP device port Data Rate Kbps Possible Settings 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Default Setting 19 2 Specifies the rate for the COM port in kilobits per second 9 6 115 2 kbps Sets the communication port speed Character Length Possible Settings 7 8 Default Setting 8 Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character NOTE Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to Net Link 7 Sets the character length to seven bits 8 Sets the character length to eight bits Use this setting if using the COM port as the network communication link Possible Settings None Even Odd Default Setting None Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port A parity bit is added to the data to make the 1 bits of each character add up to either an odd or even number Each character of transmitted data is approved as error free if the 1 bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option None Provides no parity Even Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even Odd Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 17 Communication Port Options 2 of 4 Stop Bits Possible Settings 1 2 De
240. on Network User History Synchronization Allows correlation of RMON2 User History statistics among all SLV devices in a network for more accurate OpenLane SLV reports Using a central clock called the network reference time all SLV device user history statistics are synchronized across the network further enhancing the accuracy of OpenLane SLV reports Extensive Testing Capability Provides a variety of tests to identify and diagnose device network and other problems These tests can be commanded from the unit s menu driven user interface or the OpenLane system using its easy to use Diagnostic Troubleshooting feature These tests include V 54 Loopback support so the frame relay network service provider can perform a physical loopback from its own switch without having to contact the leased line provider for loopback activation For units with ISDN backup capability ISDN backup links can be tested before they are actually needed for disaster recovery Dedicated Troubleshooting PVC Provides a troubleshooting management link that helps service providers isolate problems within their network This feature can be configured from the menu driven user interface March 2000 1 3 About the FrameSaver SLV 9626 m LMI Packet Capture Provides a way to upload data that has been captured in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis or viewed via the menu driven user interface The
241. on menu The Load Configuration From menu appears NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area may take time Allow a minute or more for the file to be loaded Select the configuration option area from which you want to load configuration options and press Enter Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 or Default Factory Configuration The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit area and the Configuration Edit Display menu appears This sequence of steps would be shown as the menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration March 2000 3 5 Configuration Changing Configuration Options B gt Procedure To change configuration option settings 1 From the Configuration Edit Display menu select a set of configuration options and press Enter For example Configuration PVC Connections 2 Select the configuration options that are applicable to your network and make appropriate changes to the setting s See Chapter 2 User Interface and Basic Operation for additional information When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs some configuration options will be blank For a valid setting to appear Tab to the configuration option and press the spacebar 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete NOTE Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuratio
242. ons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the following are supported Traffic Statistics Protocol Statistics Traffic Monitor Protocol Monitor Segment Zoom Protocol Zoom Segment Details TopNTalkers Domain History All Talkers 1 Size distribution statistics are provided for a DLCI only not a link If a link is selected all size distribution statistics on the table or graph will be zero When a DLCI is selected the first and last size distribution statistics are ignored for FrameSaver units and the statistics for those buckets appear in the next valid bucket i e bucket size 64 and 64 statistics appear in the 65 127 bucket and 51518 statistics appear in the 1024 1518 bucket Conversations and Long Term and Short Term Histories are not supported in this release As a result no data will appear on windows that include these panes 8 20 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software In addition Network Health has released the first in a series of software modules that integrate FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its reporting package see the FrameSaver SLV report example on page 9 9 To get this report you need Network Health R4 01 or higher This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver SLV devices It includes the following 9626
243. ormation Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out B gt Procedure 1 Set up directory phone numbers Main Menu Control Modem Call Directories 2 Select Directory Number A for Alarm 3 Enter the phone number s Valid characters include ASCII text Entering the phone number Space Readability characters underscore and dash Comma Readability character for a 2 second pause B Blind dialing Pulse dialing unless B is specified Tone dialing unless B is specified Wait for dial tone 4 Save the phone number s 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 9 Configuration Setting Up Auto Configuration The auto configuration feature allows you to select a method of automatic configuration and connection of DLCIs within the FrameSaver unit as well as to automatically remove DLCIs and connections that are no longer supported by the network service provider Auto configuration also maintains associated DLCI option settings when Standard LMI is used on the network interface Main Menu Auto Configuration Auto Configuration Screen Example main auto configuration 9626 Device Name Node A 1 26 1998 23 32 AUTO CONFIGURATION Frame Relay Discovery Mode lMPort Automatic Circuit Removal Enable Automatic Backup Configuration Single Site Backup Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save If the model does not have ISDN backup capability Automatic Back
244. ot suitable for user data When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted while this condition exists Two Level 1 Users Accessing Two Level 1 users are already using the menu Device driven user interface only two sessions can be active at one time nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface hhh mm ss indicates the number of hours maximum 255 minutes maximum 59 and seconds maximum 59 When 255 59 59 is exceeded the counter resets and begins the count again Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 17 Operation and Maintenance 5 18 Test Status Messages These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status screen You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for more information on tests including how to start and stop them Table 5 8 Test Status Messages 1 of 2 Message What It Indicates CSU Loopback Active Network 1 A Channel Service Unit CSU Loopback toward the network is currently running on the network interface
245. oved and the option is set to None and the link and its DLCI will be deleted None Disables or does not specify a TS Management Link PVCname Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC Display Conditions This selection only appears when a dedicated Management PVC has been defined on the network frame relay link as a DLCI with DLCI Type set to Standard 3 46 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 11 Node IP Options 3 of 3 TS Management Link Access Level Available Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP session when the service provider is using the TS Management Link Display Conditions This option does not appear when TS Management Link is set to None NOTES Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level set by the Session Access Level Login Required or FTP Login Required option settings see Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session Inactivity Timeout Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings Level 1 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Use this setting when downloading files Level 2 Allows Telnet or FTP access by n
246. pecifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number Source EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number March 2000 3 41 Configuration Table 3 10 PVC Connection Options 2 of 3 Primary Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 ISDN Link Name Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the primary destination link the to end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if the network interface has no DLCIs defined Net1 FR1 would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the destination link ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN b
247. prompt was No and Automatic Backup Configuration was disabled Response to the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt was No and Automatic Backup Configuration was set to Single Site Backup or Multi Site Backup to update and Restart Are you sure Delete All Alternate Destinations from PVC Connections Add Alternate Destinations to Current PVC Connections March 2000 updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting Yes The Delete A11 DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt appears No No previously configured DLCIs or PVC connections are removed or changed and newly discovered DLCIs will be configured according to the new discovery mode and automatic backup setting Yes All multiplexed DLCls ISDN Link Profiles except for the first one and PVC connections are deleted except for management PVCs with the user data port as the primary destination and management PVCs designated as the TS Management Link If an alternate destination has been configured on a retained Management PVC the alternate destination will be deleted but the primary destination will be retained Yes DLCI records are configured on the ISDN link s and Alternate Destination information is added to current PVC connections and management PVCs No No previously configured PVC connections are changed and newly discovered DLCls will be config
248. ptions 4 of 4 Link Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Setting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to be used Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard_out Default Setting None Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management data between devices Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link None No routing is used Proprietary A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing information only between devices to enable routing of IP traffic Standard out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information about other FrameSaver units in the network Standard RIP messages received on this link are ignored NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the COM port configured as the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ctl z WR To create this management interface make sure that Node or COM port IP Information has been set up Configuring Node IP Information 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 65 Configurat
249. r EDLCI initiating a session 5 50 3 41 3 42 8 43 3 50 3 51 INO NANANG ending a session Login Required 3 55 Enter Return key 2 6 Max Receive Rate kbps 3 55 entering Session 4 6 ISDN call profiles 3 34 natan oe system information Enterprise Specific Traps G enterprise specific traps equipment list General Error Event LMI 3 25 3 36 LEDs 5 5 Errors frame relay statistics options 3 28 Esc key SNMP management options 3 52 even parity 3 62 Traps 3 58 exception points generating reports Excess Burst Size Bits glossary Excessive grouping elements for reports BiPolar Violations BPVs linkDown trap BPVs status 5 16 6 7 External network loopback Transmit Clock IN 4 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 H hardware revision NAM HDLC errors frame relay statistics Health and Status messages 5 15 history adding files 8 13 installing files 8 15 monitoring DLCI 8 16 hyperlink to more information highlighted text I Identity displaying 5 3 Ignore Control Leads 3 63 In band Framing Error linkDown trap B 10 Inactivity Timeout 3 54 Inbound Calling ID 3 34 Initial Route Destination 3 58 Initialize_From_Network installation and setup Network Health installing Network Health 9 2 user history files interface DBM status 5 26 network status status user Internal Network Loopback
250. r Class C 255 255 255 000 Link Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Setting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to be used This option is only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol Alternate IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the alternate IP address for the modem port If this configuration option is not configured i e itis zero the modem port s primary IP address is used when the alternate telephone directory is used for dial out traps Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the modems s alternate IP address which you can view or edit Clear Clears the alternate IP address for the modem port and fills the address with zeros 3 68 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 18 Modem Port Options 4 of 4 Alternate Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the alternate subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is
251. r of the following methods to verify operation of the ISDN lines mg Check the status of the DBM interface Main Menu Status DBM Interface Status Line Status should display Active If an invalid Inv status appears e g Inv SPID for an ISDN BRI DBM in the Line Status field verify that you entered ISDN physical options correctly m Check the status of the unit Main Menu Status System and Test Status gt Health and Status column System Operational should appear If ISDN Network Failed appears check that both ends of the ISDN cable are seated properly for a good physical connection If that does not clear the message verify that you entered ISDN physical option information correctly then contact the network service provider See DBM Interface Status and Health and Status Messages for additional status information 5 48 May 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Verifying That Backup Can Take Place As each remote site is installed verify its backup operation by unplugging the network cable so the system is forced into backup m Verify the ISDN lines by checking the DBM Interface Status Main Menu Status DBM Interface Status Line Status should be Active If an invalid Inv status e g Inv SPID is displayed verify that you entered ISDN physical options correctly m Check backup setup and that data can be passed between DBMs m Reconnect the network cable See Health and Status Messages
252. rame relay link specified or models with an ISDN DBM on a non network DBM interface March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 8 Test Status Messages 2 of 2 Message Network Initiated ISDN BRI Test Active Nonlatching CSU LB Active Network 13 Nonlatching DSU LB Active Network 13 No Test Active PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn frame relay link 1 2 Send Pttn Active DLCI nnnn frame relay link 1 2 Send Pttn Active Interface Test Call Active ISDN Link Name What It Indicates An ISDN test has been initiated by the ISDN BRI network and it is currently active A network initiated nonlatching CSU or Local Loopback is currently running on the network interface performing a loop current reversal A network initiated nonlatching DSU Loopback is currently running on a 56 kbps circuit No tests are currently running A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI on the frame relay link The unit is monitoring the selected test pattern on the specified DLCI for the interface A Send Pattern test is active on the specified interface This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay A test call is active on the specified frame relay link the link being the ISDN Link Name assigned in the ISDN Link Profile This message would only appear for models with the built in DBM nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007
253. ransmitted and received on the interface and the LMI for a PVC connection will become active when the link is required Disable The frame relay link is out of service No data will be transmitted or received on the interface Outbound Phone Number Possible Settings 0 9 space or Default Setting none Specifies the phone number to call the called party ID Up to 36 digits can be entered Display Conditions This option only appears when Originate or Answer is set to Originate see Table 3 6 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options Inbound Calling ID 1 or 2 Possible Settings 0 9 Default Setting none opecifies the phone number to accept calls from calling party IDs Up to 18 digits can be entered Display Conditions This option only appears when Originate or Answer is set to Answer see Table 3 6 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options NOTE Inbound Calling ID 2 is only useful when multiple local phone numbers are programmed at the originating site e g a 2B D BRI location CAUTION All calling party IDs must be unique across all of the enabled DBM call profiles This ensures that the DBM installs the correct backup configuration on answering since the calling party ID is used to identify the remote unit and to determine which PVC mappings to use March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface Select Frame Relay from the i
254. re information about General SNMP Management configuration options March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an SNMP manager SNMP manager access can be limited by m Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit s Management Information Base MIB m Specifying the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name Whenever an SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB the community name must be supplied B gt Procedure To assign SNMP community names and access types 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication General SNMP Management 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate Set the configuration option Assign SNMP community names Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 to a community name text up to 255 characters in length Assign the type of access allowed Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read for the SNMP community names or Read Write 3 Save your changes See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 4 9 Security and Logins Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses An additional level of security is provided by L
255. recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to CIR The committed rate measurement interval Tc is recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to Other Router Independence Unique diagnostics performance monitoring PVC based in band network management and SNMP connectivity is not dependent upon external routers cables or LAN adapters Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support Provides Inverse ARP Address Resolution Protocol support so the frame relay router at one end of a management PVC can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC Standard RIP Routing Information Protocol allows the router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to that FrameSaver unit Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported Through Connections PVCs 8 Dedicated Management PVCs More than 8 PVCs can pass user data but no statistics will be collected for those additional PVCs RMON Based User History Statistics Gathering Provides everything needed to monitor network service levels plus throughput with accurate data delivery network latency and LMI and PVC availability In addition port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links These statistics are available real time via the Enterprise MIB and historically as an RMON2 User History object In future releases of the OpenLane SLM system this will enable even more accurate calculations of utilizati
256. rts Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCI s poor Health Index rating See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 9 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices 9 10 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Menu Hierarchy Menus The following is a graphical representation of the FrameSaver SLV 9626 unit s menu organization 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 Menu Hierarchy Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status otatus System and Test Status Test LMI Reported DLCIs PVC Connection Status Configuration l Network Interface Status Auto Configuration DBM Interface Status Control Performance Statistics Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity System and LMI PVC Connection Performance Test Status Reported Status Statistics Self Test Results DLCls Source Link Service Level Verification Health and DLCI DLCI EDLCI DLCI Status Status Primary Frame Relay Test Status CIR bps Destination Link DDS Line DLCI EDLCI DBM Call Status Clear All Statistics Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status MAIN MENU Status Test PVC Tests Configuration Network Auto Configuration Data Port Control ISDN Call PVC Tests Physical Tests DLCI Number
257. ry verifying DBM setup 5 49 ISDN lines 5 48 modem setup 5 46 viewing packet capture results virtual path or channel identifier vPI 1 5 IN 12 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00
258. ry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 March 2000 3 25 Configuration Configuring Service Level Verification Options SLV options are selected from the System menu see Table 3 2 Main Menu Configuration System Service Level Verification Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options 1 of 2 SLV Sample Interval secs Possible Settings 10 3600 Default Setting 60 Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver SLV devices Inband communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency as well as transmission success and other SLV information 10 3600 Sets the SL V Sample Interval secs in seconds SLV Delivery Ratio Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios FDR DDR between FrameSaver SLV devices is enabled To use this capability both ends of all PVCs must be FrameSaver SLV devices If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or 9624s they must be running software version 1 2 or higher Enable An extra byte for FDR
259. s 5 44 In addition to the statistics collected for all interfaces these additional network line statistics appear when DDS Line is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu Status Performance Statistics DDS Line Table 5 17 DDS Line Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates No Signal Count Number of times a No Signal NS condition has occurred Out of Service Count Number of times an Out of Service OOS condition has occurred Out of Frame Count Number of times an Out of Frame OOF condition has occurred Excessive BPV Count Number of times an excessive bipolar violation BPV condition has occurred This is a count of BPVs that qualify as being excessive The count is incremented when at least one invalid BPV occurs every 20 ms over a 2 second period BPV Count Number of errors received when a BPV condition has occurred This is a total count of invalid BPV errors 1 Elapsed time is also shown for all statistics except the BPV Count in the hours minutes seconds format This is the total amount of time that the FrameSaver unit has experienced the condition since the unit s last power cycle March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance DBM Call Performance Statistics For the model with a built in ISDN BRI DBM these statistics are available for ISDN calls and call attempts Main Menu Status Performance Statistics DBM Call Table 5 18 DBM Call Performance Stat
260. s and ISDN Link Profiles if the model with ISDN backup capability If the Management PVC selected is defined as a trap Initial Route Destination a Default IP Destination or a TS Management Link an Are You Sure prompt appears to warn you Table 3 12 Management PVC Options 1 of 4 Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens e g Tpa for Tampa Florida ASCII Text Entry Enter a unique name for the management PVC maximum length 8 characters Intf IP Address Possible Settings Node IP Address Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node IP Address opecifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC providing connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network Node IP Address Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address see Table 3 11 Node IP Options Special 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Allows you to display edit an IP address for the units management PVC when the IP address for this interface is different from the node s IP address March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration pit Subnet Mask Possible Settings Node Subnet Mask Calculate Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Table 3 12 Management PVC Options 2 of 4 Intf Subnet Mask Default Setting Node Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit wh
261. s m Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System m Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices 9626 A2 GB20 00 Paradyne s OpenLane Service Level Management SLM system supports all FrameSaver and FrameSaver SLV devices with the following features m Web and database services m Web access to health and status information m Web access to real time as well as historical graphs and reports m Web access to SLV reports m On demand polling of FrameSaver devices m SNMP polling and reporting m Web based diagnostic tests end to end PVC loopbacks connectivity and physical interface tests m ISDN backup support m Basic device configuration including RMON alarm and threshold configuration m Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery of SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled m Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or parts of the network m HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web interface March 2000 7 1 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System Instructions for installing Paradyne s OpenLane Service Level Management SLM System can be found in the following documents m OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for UNIX Quick Start Installation Instructions m OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions See Product Helated Documents in About This Guide for
262. s for alarms see Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template B gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens see the window in Editing Alarms 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Add button to the right of the list The Add Trap window opens Add Trap Domain s l DLCI i ss Stats Type Ethernet Stats En Trap Variable Drop Events Es Absolute Delta Rising JFalling 9 Both Threshold lp Severity 4 p Script FA H ER Description Rising Threshold Reached Falling Threshold Reached Community public public Trap Number 4 E Ip 5 Check every 50 seconds Cancel 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 8 11 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 4 Click on the button to the right of indicated fields for a drop down list from which selections can be made Minimally configure the following fields Domain User Defined DLC DLCI number for trap being assigned Stats Type PARADYNE Trap Variable Trap variable to be configured The iflndex for the frame relay logical interface is 1 Ky 0 00 DLCI number same as DLCI above
263. s is the rate at which data is transmitted over the DDS line Display Conditions This option only appears when Transmit Timing is set to Receive Auto On No Signal Automatically detects the line rate on the network interface whenever a No Signal alarm is declared the unit is reset or the line rate is changed to Auto On No Signal and saved then changes the unit s operating rate to match the network s It may take up to 15 seconds each time automatic rate detection and adjustment occurs Initialize From Network Automatically detects the line rate on the network interface once then changes the unit s operating rate to match the network s Automatic rate detection and adjustment or Autobaud will not occur again unless the line rate is changed to Initialize From Network or Auto On No Signal and saved It may take up to 15 seconds for automatic rate detection and adjustment to occur 56 Forces the line rate to 56 kbps 64CC Forces the line rate to 64 kbps Clear Channel 72 kbps on the line DSU Latching Loopback 64KCC Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit responds to the DSU Latching Loopback sequence sent by the network as specified by TR62310 Enable Responds to DSU latching loopback commands The unit remains in loopback until the network receives the loopback release sequence Disable Does not respond to the DSU loopback commands or terminat
264. ser has sent a release message to the network No other cause in the normal class applies for this normal event Called device does not respond to the call with an alert or connect indication within the prescribed period of time Internal network timers may be a cause Called number is no longer assigned An unrestricted bearer service has been requested but the device sending the cause only supports the restricted version Network is using Call Screening Call has been pre empted No other cause in the protocol error class applies for this protocol error event March 2000 What To Do Verify that the network exists Verify that the network serves the device sending the cause No action is needed No action is needed Contact the network provider if the cause continues Look in the diagnostic field for the new number then change the phone number in your ISDN link profile Arrange for the desired capability Contact the network provider to turn Call Screening off Contact the network provider Contact your service representative 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 13 Last Cause Value Messages 5 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Quality of Service 49 Requested Quality of No action is needed Unavailable Service requested cannot be provided e g throughput cannot be supported Recovery of Timer 102 Error handling proced
265. set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the modem port which you can View or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the modem port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard out Default Setting None Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management data between devices Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link None No routing is used Proprietary A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing information between devices to enable routing of IP traffic Standard out The device will respond to standard RIP requests to communicate routing information 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 69 Configuration Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup For units with the built in ISDN DBM follow this menu selection sequence to specify whether and when automatic backup is allowed see Table 3 19 Main Menu Configuration Auto Backup Criteria Table 3 19 Auto Backup Criteria Options Auto Backup Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable ET HM Determines whether backup for the access unit is aut
266. sing 120 Vac Power Supply Network Cable HJ49C BHI ISDN U Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference User Manual FrameSaver SLV 9626 User s Guide Paper Manual 9626 A2 GB20 Power Supply 120 Vac for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F1 020 NMS Products OpenLane Enterprise 7805 D1 001 OpenLane Workgroup 7805 D1 003 NetScout Manager Plus For UNIX or Windows NT 9180 NetScout Server For UNIX or Windows NT 9190 NetScout WebCast For UNIX or Windows NT 9155 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 E 1 Equipment List Cables E 2 Model Feature Description Number Optional Features Wall Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housings 9001 F1 891 Shelf Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housings 9001 F1 894 The FrameSaver SLV 9626 unit has native interfaces for its COM port data port and modem interface so the cables are readily available This table lists cables you can order Description Part Number Feature Number RJ49C Cable for an ISDN BRI DBM 035 0209 2031 3100 F1 500 unkeyed 8 pin to 8 pin modular ISDN U cable 20 feet 6 1 meters Adapter DB25 plug to 8 position modular 002 0069 0031 3100 F1 920 receptacle Used with the COM Port to LAN Adapter Cable COM Port to LAN Adapter Cable 035 0315 1431 3100 F2 910 custom unkeyed 8 pin plug to 8 pin plug modular cable 14 feet 4 3 meters Used for a LAN Adapter LANA RJ48S DDS Network Cable 035 0267 1431 3600 F 1 501 keyed 8 pin RJ48S to 8 pin RJ48S modular
267. ssive Bipolar Violations BPVs Internal Modem Failed ISDN Network Failed LMI Down No Signal Out of Frame OOF Out of Service OOS Self Test Failed SLV Timeout Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device No failures have been detected These alarms appear on the System and Test Status screen See Health and Status Messages for additional information 5 5 Operation and Maintenance 5 6 Table 5 1 General Status LEDs 2 of 2 Label Indication Color What It Means Test Mode Yellow OFF Loopback or test pattern is in progress initiated locally remotely or from the network No tests are active Unit is in Backup mode that is the backup link has been established and backup is in progress over the interface specified as an alternate link Unit is not in Backup mode and is not attempting backup Blinking ON and OFF Unit is originating or Table 5 2 Network Interface LEDs answering a backup session Label Indication Color What It Means OOS reen Out of Service Red Out of Frame Yellow No Signal FrameSaver unit is sending or receiving data or is in DMI data mode idle an all 1 s condition FrameSaver unit in CMI control mode idle an all O s condition Network is not in service Network is in service At least one OOF was detected during the sampling period No OOFs were detected during the sampling period No signal is being received from the network the
268. stration Number Refer to the equipment s label for the Certification Number Refer to the equipment s label for safety information 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 596 to 8596 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling NEMA 5 15P plug 10 3 watts 60 Hz 3 0 125 A at 120 Vac 12 Result 35 14 Btu per hour 2 9 inches 7 4 cm 8 5 inches 21 6 cm 12 5 inches 31 8 cm Weight 2 10 Ibs 0 95 kg COM Port Interface Standard Data rates 9626 A2 GB20 00 25 position DB25 connector EIA 232 ITU V 24 ISO 2110 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 kbps March 2000 Technical Specifications D 2 Table D 1 Specification Data Port Standard Data rates DDS Network Interface Data rates Services supported Physical interface USA Physical interface Canada Modem MDM Interface Data rates Link Protocol ISDN BRI DBM Interface if applicable Service supported Data rates Standards Compliance Switch Compatibility Service Supported Transmit Interface Signal Level Impedance Receive Interface Dynamic Range Impedance Modulation and Frequency Channel Equalization Receiver March 2000 FrameSaver SLV 9626 Technical Specifications 2 of 2 Criteria 34 position V 35 connector V 35 ITU ISO 2593 56 or 64 kbps automatically set to the network rate 8 position modular keyed USOC jack 56
269. t Disable Does not allow Telnet sessions Telnet Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a user ID and password referred to as the login are required to access the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If required the login used Is the same login used for an menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Management Link Enable Requires a login to access a Telnet session Disable Does not require a login 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 53 Configuration Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options 2 of 3 Session Accesstevel Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Session Access Level Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If a login is required for the session the effective access level is also determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option This option does not affect the TS Management Link NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the session or the user For example if the assigned Session Access Level is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access is allowed for the session Level 1 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with th
270. t Cause information Value Remote Call ID None Backup has never been active on the link Remote device s ID Remote call origination Last Calling ID of the remote backup device received for the B channel If the remote device initiated the call this is the Inbound Call ID If this device originated the call this is the Outbound Phone Number ISDN Channel B1 B2 The ISDN B channel 1 or 2 being used for the call on this link Negotiated Rate 64K The negotiated rate of the Kbps 56K connection link 5 28 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Last Cause Value Messages The following Last Cause Value Messages are presented in alphabetical order The Cause Number is also provided if you need to convert the message to its corresponding ITU number for your service provider Table 5 13 Last Cause Value Messages 1 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Bearer Capability User has requested a Arrange for the desired Not Authorized bearer capability that the capability user is not authorized to use Bearer Capability not Implemented Device sending this cause Arrange for the desired does not support the bearer capability capability i e channel type requested Bearer Capability Presently Not Available Bearer capability requested Arrange for the desired is supported by the device capability generating the cause but it is not available at this time
271. t Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 0 11 00 16 11 05 16 11 10 17 11 15 17 Wed Oct 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 8 16 March 2000 11 20 16 11 25 16 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 5 Select History List from the View menu The History List window opens The newly defined user history variables should appear on this list History List serHistorul serHistoru UserHistorys Ok Cancel 6 Highlight the desired set of user history variables and select the OK button Data is gathered based upon the configured user history variables This may take some time so please be patient 7 Select 2D or 3D Bar from the Format menu if desired 3D Bar is shown NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 0 11 02 16 11 07 16 11 12 17 11 17 17 11 22 17 11 27 17 Wed Oct 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 BH 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 CJ 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 CJ 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 8 17 Setting Up NetS
272. t Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLCI with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Net1 FR1 Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection Port 1 Specifies that the frame relay link on the user data port be used in the connection ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link on the DBM to be used in the connection This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link on an installed DBM Clear Clears the link and the DLCI field and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was multiplexed 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 49 Configuration Table 3 12 Management PVC Options 3 of 4 Primary DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI NOTES DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number inclusive Primary EDLCI Possi
273. t asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface can be limited by m Requiring a login m Assigning an access level to the port or interface An asynchronous terminal can be connected to the units COM communications port or its modem port 4 2 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins B gt Procedure To limit asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface 1 Select the appropriate port options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication Communication Port Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication Modem Port 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate Set the configuration option Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login Limit the effective access level to Port Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 Level 3 or Level 2 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the port e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 port access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow Level 1 users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 NOTE See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertently 3 Save your changes If connecting
274. t relates to FrameSaver SLV devices It includes the following Before Getting Started Configuring NetScout Manager Plus Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network Verifying Domains and Groups Correcting Domains and Groups Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Editing Alarms Adding SLV Alarms Manually Creating History Files Installing the User Defined History Files Monitoring a DLCI s History Data Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Statistical Windows Supported Release 5 5 or higher of the NetScout Manager Plus software provides FrameSaver SLV specific support 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 8 1 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Before Getting Started Before getting started you need to copy some OpenLane directories to a NetScout Manager Plus user directory OpenLane provides these directories as a starting point for loading new alarms and creating history files A template of alarms and values for configuring alarms and several templates for creating history files specific to the FrameSaver unit are available OpenLane paradyne directories include the following m Properties paradyne fsd file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory m Properties paradyne fst file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory m Alarms slvtemplate fct file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory User history pd udh files found in
275. t s CIR No additional configuration should be required However you should verify that all appropriate information has been retrieved NOTE If an SLV unit does not have CIR configured or if it is not configured correctly Network Health sets the units CIR to 0 kbps For this reason you should reconfigure the unit s CIR before Network Health polls it If O kbps is the speed setting you will need to edit the units CIR from Network Health Additional information that can be edited as well See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information B gt Procedure To change the CIR for FrameSaver SLV unit elements from Network Health 1 Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering dialog box once the discovery process is completed The Poller Configuration window opens 2 Double click on the first element discovered The Modify Element dialog box opens 3 In the Speed box select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the unit in the text box Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts e g enter 56 k for 56 kilobits per second or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second 4 Apply your changes Select the Apply Next button to save your change and bring up the next element to be edited Continue until all newly discovered frame relay elements have been modified before selecting the OK button Select the the OK button The Modify Element dialog box closes 5 Se
276. tatistics Layers 1 and 2 are collected on the port The following menu shows the performance statistics that can be selected Performance Statistics Menu main status performance dds 9626 Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Service Level Verification DLCI Frame Relay DDS Line DBM Call Clear All Statistics Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu DBM Call Statistics only appear for the model with the built in ISDN BRI DBM 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 35 Operation and Maintenance Clearing Performance Statistics 5 36 Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a directly connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level is Level 1 This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature True statistic counts are always maintained so SLAs can be verified and they can be viewed from an SNMP NMS However since statistics can be cleared locally the statistics viewed via the menu driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the NMS B Procedure To clear all statistics Performance Statistics Clear All Statistics B gt Procedure To clear specific sets of statistics Use the ClrSLV amp DLCIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of the following screens Perfor
277. terval must be entered in seconds 2 Type dvuhist f agentname DLCI number user history table number config number of buckets interval download file udh to load user defined history files for a specific DLCI Example dvuhist f Dallas51 301 3 config 30 60 Dallas301 udh The same user history table number can be used for both the link and DLCI For these examples user history table number 3 will appear as UserHistory3 on the History List See Step 5 in Monitoring a DLCI s History Data to verify that the user defined history files have been loaded Refer to nstalling UDH Files in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information March 2000 8 15 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Monitoring a DLCI s History Data Once the monitoring variables have been defined a problem DLCI can monitored B Procedure To monitor user history data 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay radio button still selected select the Traffic radio button The appropriate icons appear 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCIs appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 Highlight the DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on the Custom History icon The NetScout Custom History window opens Adjust the size of the window so the entire report can be viewed NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 NetScou
278. tion options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable Telnet access Telnet Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login Assign an access level Session Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the Telnet session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 3 Save your changes 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 4 5 Security and Logins See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about setting Telnet configuration options Limiting FTP Access FTP access can be limited by m Disabling FTP access completely m Requiring a user ID and password to login m Limiting FTP bandwidth B Procedure To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable FTP FTP Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to
279. tistic What It Indicates Inbound Dropped Total number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that Characters were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear NA appears instead of a statistical count if FDR DDR Frame Delivery Ratio Data Delivery Ratio information is not being received from the far end device m Above CIR The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit m Within CIR The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were within within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit Between CIR amp EIR The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit m Above EIR The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit Latest RdTrip Latency Current round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Unknown appears if communication with the far end device is not successful Avg RdTrip Latency Average round trip lat
280. to 10 seconds provides advance detection of network problems before a DLCI Down indication is received to minimize data loss Provides customer premises equipment CPE with a Backward Explicit Congestion Notification BECN when backup bandwidth is not sufficient for the traffic allowing the CPE time to slow traffic to the ISDN before the network starts discarding data Provides test call capability on ISDN backup links so ISDN and backup function can be verified before there is an actual primary link failure and switchover to the backup link Periodic tests are recommended which can be performed from the menu driven user interface or through SNMP commands Up to two B channels each having a different destination can be used to back up the primary path NOTE Since the DBM is built into the unit it cannot be retrofitted with a DBM at a later date it must be ordered with this feature 1 4 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 About the FrameSaver SLV 9626 ATM VPI VCI and DLCI Correlation For networks with both ATM and frame relay access endpoints allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating Virtual Path or Channel Identifier VPI VCI in the far end ATM access endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped so they can be correlated for OpenLane SLV reports m Back to Back Operation Allows two FrameSaver devices to be connected via a leased line network or simulation so a point to point configuration can be implemented
281. to get your security level changed Wrong file was specified when the put command was entered Try again entering the correct file with the put command User attempted to upload a program file from the unit Enter the put command instead of a get command you can only transfer files to the unit not from it See Upgrading System Software Wait until message clears No action needed Command takes longer than 5 seconds Yes or y was entered in the Reset COM Port usage field of the System Paused menu March 2000 5 11 Operation and Maintenance 5 12 Table 5 5 Device Messages 5 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Test Active No higher priority health m Contact service provider if test and status messages exist initiated by the network and a test is running m Wait until the test ends and message clears m Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test m Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from User Interface Already in Use Two Telnet sessions are Wait and try again already in use when an attempt to access the menu driven user interface through the COM port is made Contact one of the IP address user and request that they log off IP addresses and logins of the users currently accessing the interface are also provided User Interface ldle Previously active session is now closed ended
282. ttings Originate Answer Default Setting Originate Specifies whether the unit s DBM will originate or answer dial backup calls The DBM at one end of the circuit must be configured to originate calls while the other must be configured to answer calls Originate Places dial backup calls the recommended setting for a remote site DBM Answer Answers dial backup calls the recommended setting for a central site DBM Service Profile ID SPID 1 or 2 Possible Settings 3 20 digits Default Setting Clear Specifies the SPID number assigned by the ISDN service provider for Bearer channel 1 B1 and Bearer channel 2 B2 SPID numbers are used by the switch to identify which ISDN services the DBM can access All blanks is a valid setting 3 20 digits You can enter a SPID number or you can leave blanks If a nondigit numeric is entered an Invalid Character x message appears at the bottom of the screen If fewer than three digits numerics are entered an Invalid SPID must be at least 3 digits message appears at the bottom of the screen Clear Clears the SPID field so it can be reentered Local Phone Number 1 or 2 Possible Settings 10 digits Default Setting Clear Provides the telephone number associated with Bearer channel 1 B1 and 2 B2 All blanks is a valid setting 10 digits Enter the telephone number up to 10 digits If a nondigit numeric is entered an Invalid Character x message appears at the
283. ture LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature A packet capture utility has been provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI errors are detected Using this utility any enabled frame relay link on the user data port or network interface can be selected The utility captures any LMI packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called Imitrace syc in the system s data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information See Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface for additional information on this feature B Procedure To use this utility 1 Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu Control LMI Packet Capture Utility 2 Select an enabled frame relay link or Capture Interface either Net1 FR1 or Port 1 3 Start packet capture While capturing data the status is Active Packets in Buffer indicates the number of packets that have been captured Up to 8000 packets can be held When the buffer is full the oldest packets will be overwritten 4 To stop the utility press Enter The field toggles back to Start 5 Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for debugging decoding See ransferring Collected Data in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for additional information about this
284. u can poll SLV units and collect data To use this application 1 Discover network elements units and interfaces in the network 2 Configure the Network Health applications then save them 3 Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes 4 Set up and run reports Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health User Guide The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once you have access to the applications See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup information and a full discussion of the application s features and how to use them 9 2 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Discovering FrameSaver Elements Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications the Discover dialog box opens Use this dialog box to search for SLV units in your network and discover their DLCls Saving the results of the search creates definitions in the Poller Configuration which are used to poll the units IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver units must be entered for Network Health to find the SLV units on the network and discover their elements These elements are resources that can be polled e g LAN WAN interfaces frame relay circuits routers and servers The two types of elements that can be polled are m Statistics elements Provide counters and other gauges for information gath
285. ubnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node subnet mask with zeros When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 March 2000 3 45 Configuration Table 3 11 Node IP Options 2 of 3 Default IP Destination Possible Settings Default Modem COM PVCname Default Setting Default Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route Examples m f the default IP network is connected to the communications port select COM m fthe default IP network is connected to a far end device over the management PVC named London for the remote device located in the London office select the PVC name London as defined by the Name configuration option Table 3 12 Management PVC Options NOTE Ifthe link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes disabled or down the unrouteable data will be discarded Make sure that the link selected is operational and if that link goes down change the default destination CAUTION Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS rout
286. umber of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 3 36 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 8 Interface Frame Relay Options 3 of 3 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 37 Configuration Manually Configuring DLCI Records The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures DLCI Records and their PVC Connections DLCI Records can also be created manually see Table 3 9 Main Menu Configuration Network Data Ports ISDNj DLCI Records ISDN is only
287. up Configuration does not appear see Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration for additional information if the unit has ISDN backup capability 3 10 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode 9626 A2 GB20 00 When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is active the FrameSaver unit discovers network DLCIs from the network LMI status response message It configures a network DLCI a user data port DLCI and automatically connects them to create a PVC Main Menu Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically configured network DLCIs are multiplexed and each automatically configured port DLCI carries the same DLCI Number as its corresponding network DLCI These are the same DLCI numbers that would have been available had the FrameSaver unit not been inserted in the link between your equipment and the network NOTE A local Management PVC e g the PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit s user data port must be configured manually it cannot be configured automatically see Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site The following will occur when a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected Discovery Mode Configuration Description 1MPort m Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 default m A management DLCI is configured m A multiplexed network DLCI containing two embedded DLCIs EDLCIs is configured for Port 1 user data and management data A PVC
288. uration Table 3 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 2 of 5 Initial Route Destination Possible Settings AutoRoute COM PVCname Default Setting AutoRoute Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager When proprietary RIP is active only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management link as the initial destination All other units can use the default setting Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option AutoRoute Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route for sending traps to the specified Trap Manager or the Default IP Destination when no route is available in the routing table see Table 3 11 Node IP Options COM Uses the COM port This selection is only available when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 17 Communication Port Options PVCname Uses the defined management inkname the name given the Management PVO This selection only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for the node General Traps Possible Settings Disable Warm AuthFail Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and or authenticationFailure events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Disable Does not send trap messages for these events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events only AuthFail
289. ure Retry the call Expired has been initiated as a result of the expiration of a timer Requested Channel 44 Circuit or channel Allow the DBM to Not Available requested cannot be automatically call using the provided by the other side alternate link if Auto of the interface Backup is enabled or manually select an alternate path for the call Requested Facility 69 Supplemental service No action is needed Not Implemented requested is not supported by this device Requested Facility 50 The supplementary service Arrange for the desired Not Subscribed requested cannot be capability provided by the network until user completes arrangement with its supporting networks Resource 47 No other cause in the No action is needed Unavailable resource unavailable class Unspecified applies for this resource unavailable event Response to 30 Status enquiry message No action is needed STATus ENQuiry received generating this message Service Option Not 79 No other cause in the No action is needed Implemented service or option not available class applies for this not implemented event Service Option 63 No other cause in the Wait and try again Unavailable service or option not Unspecified available class applies for this not available event Switching 42 Switching equipment Wait and try again Equipment sending the cause is Congestion experiencing heavy traffic 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 33 Operation and Ma
290. ured according to the new discovery mode and automatic backup setting 9626 A2 GB20 00 The following prompt When the appears m Response to the Remove Alternate Destinations from PVCs and delete unused DLCI Records prompt was Yes and Automatic Backup Configuration was disabled Add Alternate Destinations to Current PVC Connections Response to the Remove Alternate Destinations from PVCs and delete unused DLCI Records prompt was Yes and Automatic Backup Configuration was set to Single Site Backup or Multi Site Backup NOTE Configuration If you select m No No previously configured DLC ls ISDN Link Profiles or PVC Connections are removed or changed but updates due to LMI responses will be performed using the new setting Yes All Alternate Destination information will be removed from PVC Connections and Management PVCs and all DLCIs and ISDN Link Profiles except for the first one used exclusively as Alternate Destinations are deleted No No previously configured PVC Connections are removed or changed but updates due to LMI responses will be performed using the new setting Yes Alternate Destination information is configured for current DLCIs ISDN Link Profiles PVC Connections and Management PVCs on the ISDN DBM interface except for the Management PVC designated as the TS Management Link When DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs for the
291. urrent Software Revision Main Menu Status Identity NOTE If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the unit s Identity screen while the unit is downloading software the In Progress message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field See Displaying System Information to see what is included on the unit s Identity screen 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 5 53 Operation and Maintenance Transferring Collected Data SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP which is faster than other methods The rate at which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the FTP Max Receive Rate Kbps option see Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options in Chapter 3 Configuration NOTE Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet data the data files are not in user readable format LMI packet capture data can also be viewed via the LMI Trace Log see Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for additional information B Procedure To retrieve data 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data will be retrieved 2 Type bin to enter binary transfer mode 3 Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment 4 Type cd data to change to the
292. ust be hh mm ss A non valid system time was entered on the System Information screen Invalid Already A test was already in No action needed Active progress when it was selected Invalid Password Login is required and an Try again incorrect password was entered access is denied Contact your system administrator to verify your password Invalid Test A conflicting loopback or Wait until other test ends and Combination pattern test was in progress message clears when Start was selected to start another test or was active on the same or another interface when Stop the test from the same Start was selected screen the test was started from Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Limit of six Login IDs An attempt to enter a new Delete another login password reached login ID was made and the combination limit of six login password combinations has been reached Reenter the new login ID Limit of Mgmt PVCs New was selected from the Do not create the reached PVC Connection Table and management PVC the maximum number of management PVCs has Delete another management already been created PVC and try again March 2000 5 9 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 5 Device Messages 3 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Limit of PVC Connections reached Name Must be Unique No Destination Link DLCls Available No DLCls available for connection
293. ve your changes March 2000 Set the configuration option NMS IP Validation to Enable Number of Managers to the desired number NMS n IP Address to the appropriate IP address Access Level to Read or Read Write 9626 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options Creating a Login A login is required if security is enabled Up to six login ID password combinations can be created using ASCII text and each login must have a specified access level Logins must be unique and they are case sensitive B gt Procedure To create a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu Control Administer Logins 2 Select New and set the following configuration options as appropriate In the field Enter the Login ID ID of 1 to 10 characters Password Password from 1 to 10 characters Re enter password Password again to verify that you entered the correct password into the device Access Level Access level 1 2 or 3 m Level 1 User can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing m Level 2 User can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information m Level 3 User can only monitor and display status and configuration screens CAUTION Make sure at least one login is set up for
294. ver SLV OOO NETWORK PORT 00 16477 01 The Display LEDs and Control Leads screen allows you to monitor a remote unit and is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems The appropriate interfaces are shown on this screen with the appropriate status highlighted Main Menu Status Display LEDs and Control Leads Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen main status leds 9626 Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 DISPLAY LEDS amp CONTROL LEADS DDS FR NAM GENERAL NETWORK1 PORT 1 OK Data Mode OK Alarm OOS TXD Test OOF RXD Backup No Signal DTR RTS ESC for previous menu Refresh Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions LED and control lead descriptions are in the sections that follow 5 4 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 LED Descriptions 9626 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance The following table identifies the alarms that cause the Alarm LED to light See Table 5 2 and Table 5 3 for network interface and user data port LED information Table 5 1 General Status LEDs 1 of 2 Label Indication Power and Operational Status Operational Alarm Fail Color March 2000 What It Means OFF FrameSaver unit has power and it is operational FrameSaver unit is in a power on self test or there is a failure FrameSaver unit has just been reset or an error or fault has been detected Error fault alarm conditions m Cross Pair Detection CTS Down DLCI Down DTR Down Exce
295. vering elements DLCls Discovery frame relay FR 3 11 Frame Relay Mode saving a mode change displaying configuration options identity information LEDs and control leads DLCI Destination 3 42 3 43 Down 5 15 6 7 on SLV Timeout interface status monitoring user history Number 3 38 Priority 3 40 Records 3 38 Source 3 41 statistics status 5 20 Traps on Interfaces Type 3 38 DM LED 5 6 domains and groups correcting verifying 8 5 download capability downloading determining when completed MIBs and SNMP traps SLV alarms software 5 50 user history file 8 13 DSU Latching Loopback 3 30 Loopback 6 24 March 2000 IN 3 Index DTE F Loopback 6 26 Port 1 LEDs 5 7 faceplate 5 4 port connector pin assignments C 4 FDR 1 2 port initiated loopbacks features DTLB field is blank empty DTR file transfer control lead FTP file transfer protocol 3 54 down Session down from Port 1 Device 5 15 dn sind Ratio FDR 1 2 rame Relay i LEES configuring interface 3 35 E configuring system Discovery 3 11 EDLCI 3 50 3 51 saving a mode change 3 13 Destination statistics Source 3 41 troubleshooting PVC problems EIA 232C COM Port connector frames 3 49 EIR statistics 5 37 FTP 1 4 15 50 elements DLCls file transfers Embedded Data Link Connection Identifie
296. ws an FTP session between the system and an FTP client Disable Does not allow FTP sessions 3 54 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options 3 of 3 FTP Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session If required the login used is the same login used for a menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Management Link Enable User is prompted for a login ID and password Disable No login is required for an FTP session FTP Max Receive Rate kbps Possible Settings 1 115 Default Setting 115 Sets the maximum receive rate of file transfer to the system This option allows new software and configuration files to be downloaded using selected bandwidth without interfering with normal operation Using this option new software and configuration files can be downloaded quickly using the default settings or at a slower rate over an extended period of time by selecting a slower speed Based upon TCP flow control the FTP server in the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting 1 115 Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to the maximum management speed 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 3 55 Configuration Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to
297. x devFrExt mib devFrExtDlciDlci devFrExt mib devFrExtDlciMissed SLVs devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib For physical interfaces and frame relay links m iflndex RFC 1573 m 0 0 placeholder m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib For virtual circuits DLCls m devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib m devFrExtDiciDici devFrExt mib m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib March 2000 SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold has been exceeded String SLV down on SifString due to excessive SLV packet loss Total SLV packets lost is numLost SLV Timeout Error Event has been cleared String SLV up on SifString because SLV communication was reestablished Total SLV packets lost is numLost All RMON related option changes have been reset to their default values Default Factory Configuration settings have been reloaded returning RMON related options to their original settings String RMON database reset to defaults Unit has completed re initialization and a hardware failure was detected String Self test failed s s is the contents of devSelfTestResult At least one test has been started on an interface or virtual circuit String testString test started on ifString e g DTE Loopback test started on Sync Data
298. xCrcErrs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkT xUnderruns MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotalL MIErrs B 29 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 30 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments This appendix shows the FrameSaver unit s rear panel and the pin assignments for the connectors interfaces and cables Rear Panels The following illustration shows the FrameSaver SLV 9626 without a DBM NET MDM 99 16476 The following illustration shows the FrameSaver SLV 9626 with a DBM NET MDM DBM 99 16475 The sections that follow provide pin assignments for these ports and interfaces NOTE In the pin assignment tables of this appendix if the pin number is not shown it is not being used 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 C 1 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments COM Port Connector The following table provides the pin assignments for the 1 slot FrameSaver 9626 standalone unit s 25 position EIA 232C communication port connector Direction Shield GND DCE Transmit Data TXD DCE Receive Data RXD DCE Request To Send RTS DCE Clear To Send CTS To DTE Out 5 DCE Data Set Ready DSR From
299. y B gt Procedure To send a 511 test pattern using an external loopback connector 1 Remove the network cable so that a No Signal NS condition occurs 2 Start the Send Pattern test 3 Place the loopback cable on the network or DTE port interface 4 Start the Monitor 511 test 9626 A2 GB20 00 March 2000 6 25 Troubleshooting Monitor 511 DTE Loopback 6 26 For Monitor 511 a 511 test pattern being sent over the network or DTE port interface can be monitored To view the test results see the Network or Port n Physical Tests screen Main Menu 5 Test gt Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests gt Monitor 511 The current number of bit errors is shown under the Result column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync An Out of Sync message appears when the test pattern generator and receiver have not yet synchronized This error count is updated every second If the maximum count is reached 999994 is shown in the field NOTE The 511 monitor expects external equipment to provide the clock for the 511 pattern for timing the incoming pattern on interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC with the DTE as the source The DTE external Loopback DTLB test loops the received signal on a DTE interface back to the DTE without affecting the operation of the remaining ports Use this test for isolating problems on the DTE interface Main Menu Test Data Port Physical Tests DTE Loopba
300. ype in enter the field value or command Example Entering bjk as a user s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen from the Control menu branch Type in enter the first letter s of a field value or command using the unit s character matching feature Example When configuring a port s physical characteristics with the Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks configuration option field selected possible settings include Disable Local DTPLB DCLB and Both entering d or D displays the first value starting with d Disable In this example entering dt or DT would display DTPLB as the selection owitch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated function key Example To save a configuration option change select Save S or s is the designated function key If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections press the spacebar the first valid setting for the field appears Continue pressing the spacebar to scroll through other possible settings March 2000 2 9 User Interface and Basic Operation 2 10 March 2000 9626 A2 GB20 00 Configuration This chapter includes the following m Basic Configuration Configuration Option Areas Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options Changing Configuration Options Saving Configuration Options Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units m Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock m Setting Up the Mode

9626-A2-GB20-00 - Zhone Technologies

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents